JP6983426B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a gaming table characterized by a change of the gaming table when a setting is made with respect to a gaming table represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine). SOLUTION: A first device 144L, 144R or the like, a second device 157, and a selection operation means capable of selecting a first setting (power saving mode setting) according to an operation are provided and selected. When the operation means is operated and the first setting (power saving mode setting) is selected, the first device 144L, 144R and the like shift to the first state (light-off state), and then the second device 157. May shift to the second state (the state where the demo animation is played in a dark state). [Selection Diagram] FIG. 79

Description

The present invention relates to a game console represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

Conventionally, as one of the game consoles, for example, a slot machine and a pachinko machine are known. The slot machine uses a predetermined number of game media, and by operating the start lever, a lottery is performed to determine an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations, and a plurality of reels are rotated to determine the winning combination. It is configured to stop the reels based on the internal winning combination and the operation result of the stop button, and to give a profit according to the winning combination determined by the mode of the stopped reel.

In addition, in pachinko machines, it is common to provide obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls in the game area of the game board, and a winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening, etc. in which the game ball can win a prize. Is. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball.

In these game consoles, various settings are made according to the operation (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-29515

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the change of the game table when the setting is made.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having characteristics regarding changes in the game table when the setting is made.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
Light emitting means and
Display means and
A selection operation means that allows you to select the power saving mode setting according to the operation,
It is a game table equipped with
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means.
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the first light emitting means may shift to the first state corresponding to the power saving mode setting. ,
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the display means may shift to a second state corresponding to the power saving mode setting.
When the selection operation means is operated, the power saving mode setting is selected, and the display means shifts to the second state, the first light emitting means shifts to the first state and then shifts. death,
The first light emitting means does not shift to the first state even if the selection operation means is operated while the non-demo animation is displayed and the power saving mode setting is selected, but the demo animation does. all SANYO migrating the setting of the selection operation means is operated該省power mode is selected in the state being displayed on the state of the first,
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the display means is displaying the demo animation, the display means does not display the display of the demo animation to the end and the demo animation is displayed. you start a new from the beginning the display of,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by changes in the game console when the setting is made.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention in a plane, and (b) is the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout and the operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Flow of second sub-control unit main process, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows. It is a figure explaining the production outline of the three-card betting game and the two-card betting game in the embodiment C1 of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the outline of the effect when the slot machine executes a pseudo-bonus confirmation notification in Example C1 and then executes a three-card betting game. It is a figure explaining the outline of the effect when the slot machine executes the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification in Example C1 and then executes the two-card betting game. It is a figure explaining an example of the continuous production in Example C2 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining another example of the continuous production in Example C2 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the continuous effect shown in FIG. It is an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device in the embodiment C3 of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device when the two-card betting game is executed in the embodiment C3 of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a modification of the effect displayed on the effect image display device in the embodiment C3 of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the transition of the effect mode displayed on the effect image display device when the button effect is executed in the embodiment C4 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change in the effect mode of the effect image display device when one game of a two-card bet game is executed in the next game after the button effect shown in FIG. 17 is started, and then a three-card bet game is executed. It is a figure explaining the notification period of the double bet notification in Example C5 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the notification period of the two-card bet notification shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect performed in Example C5 of the slot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which expands and shows the arrangement of the design applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention in a plane. (B) It is a figure which shows the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment A1 of this invention. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. (A) The image of the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 is illustrated. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the judge state production table. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (D) is a figure which showed the modification of the LMT state effect table. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) (1) to (a) (4) It is a figure which showed the example which started the 1st effect (total notification) in the continuous hit effect in time series. (B) (1) to (b) (3) It is a figure which showed the example which starts the 2nd effect (privilege effect) in the continuous hit effect in chronological order. (C) It is a figure which showed the other example of the operation request display. (A) (1) to (a) (8) It is a figure which showed the example which starts the 3rd effect (result notification effect) in the judge effect in chronological order. (B) (7) to (b) (8) An example of the effect when the button image (operation request display) is displayed during the judge effect but the effect button (first operation means) is not operated is shown. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed the example which started the 2nd effect (result notification effect) while the 1st effect (total notification) is executed in the continuous hitting effect in chronological order. (A) (1) to (a) (8) It is a figure which showed the example which started the operation response effect after displaying the operation request display in the judge victory effect in chronological order, FIG. 36 (a) (1). It is a figure corresponding to the figure (a) (8). (B) (1) to (b) (2) It is a figure which showed an example of the judge defeat production (the production when the AT lottery in CZ is not won). It is a figure which showed the effect example in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed (the second case) in a judge revival effect. It is a figure which showed the effect example in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (the second case), and the operation means is operated and the operation response effect is started (the third case). .. In the figure showing an example of the effect in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge defeat effect (second case) and the operation means is operated but the operation response effect is not started (fourth case). be. An example of an effect in which the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating when the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (second case). It is a figure shown in time series. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100. It is a perspective view which shows the handle member 104. It is a perspective view which shows the handle member 104. It is a side view which shows the handle member 104. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the handle member 104. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the side plate 103 without the handle member 104, and (b) is a side view showing the positional relationship with the handle member 104 in the state of being attached to the side plate 103, (c). Is an enlarged side view showing a part of the handle member 104. It is a figure which shows an example of the state of the handle member 104 in the process of attaching (removing) to a side plate 103. It is a figure which shows an example of the state of the handle member 104 in the process of attaching (removing) to a side plate 103. It is a figure which shows the modification of the handle member 104. It is a figure which shows typically the slot machine 100 to which this invention can apply. It is a figure which shows the state of various notification means when a door opening error is detected. It is a figure which shows the state of the various notification means after the display ES21 by the 1st display mode of the 2nd error display and the display ES21'by the 1st display mode of the 2nd same content error display are started. It is a timing chart of the notification mode after the door opening error is detected. It is a figure which shows the state of various notification means when the hopper empty error of the error code E2 is detected. It is a figure which shows the state of various notification means after the 3rd error display ES30 and the 3rd error display ES30'with the same contents are started. It is a timing chart of the notification mode after the hopper empty error is detected. It is a figure which shows the state of various notification means when the medal passage confirmation error of the error code E7 is detected. It is a figure which shows the state of various notification means after the 4th error display ES40 and the 4th error display ES40'with the same contents are started. It is a timing chart of the notification mode after the medal passage confirmation error is detected. It is a timing chart when a door open error is detected before the hopper empty error is detected and the error is resolved. It is a timing chart when a medal passage confirmation error is detected before the door opening error is detected and the error is resolved. It is a figure which shows the modification of the error notification using the 1st image display device 157 and the 2nd image display device 158. It is a figure which shows the modification of the error notification which continues from FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the error notification which continues from FIG. 65. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of a line. It is a front view which shows the slot machine 100 in the state which the front door is opened. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a reel unit 700. (A) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740. It is a figure which shows the 1st selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 69. It is a figure which shows the selection example of the setting value using the 1st selection switch 190 and the 2nd selection switch 194. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. It is a figure which shows the demo animation displayed on the production image display device 157 in the demonstration production. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, and (b) is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the display screen which is displayed when the 1st chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in 79 (h). It is a figure which shows the state of the effect image display apparatus 157 and various lamps step by step when it is selected to set a power saving mode in a state where a non-demo animation is displayed. It is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 77. The state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the selection is made to open the front door 102 and set the power saving mode while holding the open / close piece while the demo animation is displayed is stepwise. It is a figure which shows. It is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 79. When the front door 102 is opened and the power saving mode is selected without pressing the open / close piece while the demo animation is displayed, the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps is stepwise. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the state of the effect image display apparatus 157 and various lamps step by step when it is selected to set a power saving mode with a hopper empty error still occurring. It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine to which this invention can apply from the back side. (A) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game after performing the three-card betting game in a normal state in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game after performing the three-card betting game in the specialized state in chronological order. (C) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the three-card betting game in the specialization state in chronological order. (D) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game in the specialization state in chronological order. (E) It is a figure which showed the transition example of the game state of AT system. (A) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the three-card betting game in the normal state in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the three-card betting game in the specialization state in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game after performing the three-card betting game in a normal state in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game after performing the three-card betting game in the specialized state in chronological order. (C) It is a figure which showed the production example in time series when the three-card betting game is performed in the specialization state, and the cumulative number of points reaches the target value. (D) It is a figure which showed an example of the change of various counters in a normal state in time series. (E) It is a figure which showed an example of the change of various counters in a specialization state in time series. (A) (1) to (A) (2) It is a figure which showed the example which the setting suggestion A is started to display in relation to the execution of a three-card betting game in chronological order. (A) (3) to (A) (4) It is a figure which showed the example which the setting suggestion B is started to display in relation to the execution of a three-card betting game in chronological order. (B) (1) to (B) (2) It is a figure which showed the example in which the setting suggestion A is not started in relation to the execution of a two-card betting game in chronological order. (B) (3) to (B) (4) It is a figure which showed the example which the setting suggestion B is started to display in relation to the execution of a two-card betting game in chronological order. (C) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the three-card betting game in the high navigation state in chronological order. (D) It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game in the high navigation state in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the example in time series which suggests the setting by the game start operation as a trigger in the game which changed from the judge (AT1) to AT2. (B) In the game in which the judge (AT1) has finished, an example in which setting suggestion is performed triggered by the game start operation is shown in chronological order. (C) It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order that after the three-card betting game is executed in the final game of AT2, the setting suggestion is performed with the third stop operation as a trigger in the next three-card betting game. (D) It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order that the setting suggestion is performed by the effect button operation as an opportunity. (A) It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order that the setting suggestion is not performed in the state which the victory screen of a judge (AT1) is displayed. (B) It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order that the setting suggestion is not performed in the state that the defeat screen of the judge (AT1) is displayed. (C) It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order that after the three-card betting game is executed in the final game of AT2, the setting suggestion is performed with the third stop operation as a trigger in the next two-card betting game. (D) It is a figure which showed the example in chronological order that the setting suggestion is not performed by the 3rd stop operation as a trigger in a two-card betting game. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the predetermined number acquisition display (setting suggestion display). (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion display lottery table.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110-112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the reel window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 110-112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114. The valid winning line 114 is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line will be added to the three medals. If three bets are placed, the five lines to which the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line are added may be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, a game in which three medals are inserted may be referred to as a “three-card betting game”, and a game in which two medals are inserted may be referred to as a “two-card betting game”.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a push order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is called "forward push operation order". The operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called "middle push operation order" or simply "middle push" is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an effect device for executing an effect described later.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated when performing a predetermined effect. In the present embodiment, an effect suggesting the granting of a privilege may be executed based on the operation of the effect button 192.

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the effect button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127) is provided, respectively.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 3A. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a plane-developed manner.

On each reel 110-112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 frame on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 frame on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 frame on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. The "watermelon" design is arranged respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 (b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. Of the winning roles in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are the bonus roles for shifting to the bonus game, and the replay is the replay without inserting a new medal. As a role that enables a game, it may be called a "working role" to be distinguished from a winning role, but the "winning role" in the present embodiment includes a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a replaying role that are operating roles. Is included. In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, big bonus, regular. Includes bonuses and winning replays.

The winning roles of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small roles (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The "big bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (actuating role) in which a big bonus game (BB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "BB1 symbol (also referred to as white 7) -BB1 symbol-BB1 symbol" and BB2 "BB2 symbol (also referred to as blue 7) -BB2 symbol-BB2 symbol". Also, for BB1 and BB2, the flags are carried over. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a predetermined area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in the game, the prize is won. The flag indicating the internal winning is maintained until the game is completed, and even after the next game, BB1 and BB2 are internally winning, and the symbol combination "white 7-white 7-white 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2 are displayed. The combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" is in a state of winning all together.

The "regular bonus (RB)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "RB") is a special role (actuating role) in which a regular bonus game (RB game) is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combination is "RB symbol (also referred to as bonus) -RB symbol-RB symbol". As for RB, the flag is carried over in the same manner as the above-mentioned BB. However, in the big bonus game (BB game), the big bonus game is started without the start condition that the regular bonus game (RB game) is internally won and the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. The regular bonus game may be started later, and when one regular bonus game is completed, the regular bonus game may be automatically started so that the next regular bonus game is started immediately.

"Small role (cherry, watermelon, bell) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as" cherry "," watermelon "," bell ") is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol. The combination is "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol" for cherry, "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" for watermelon, and "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" for bell. The corresponding payouts are as shown in the figure, with 4 cherries, 12 watermelons, and 8 bells. In the case of "cherry symbol-ANY symbol-ANY symbol", the symbol of the left reel 110 may be a "cherry" symbol, and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (operating role) that allows a game to be played without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" for the replay game.

Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

The internal winning probability of each combination is the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each combination, and the numerical data in the range of the random number value acquired at the time of the internal lottery described later (65536 in this embodiment). It is calculated by dividing by. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, this lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one role, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set one of the set values. ..

In the present embodiment, the watermelon and the cherry each win a prize when the winning combination is internally won in the internal lottery process and the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Hereinafter, watermelon and cherry are also referred to as chance roles. In addition, the bell wins a prize when the winning combination is internally elected in the internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. Hereinafter, the bell is also referred to as a push order role.

The AT state is a gaming state in which information (stop operation content) that is advantageous to the player is notified when the chance combination or the push order combination is internally won. In the AT state, the effect image display device 157 and the payout number display device 127 are used to execute an operation navigation for notifying the stop operation content to assist the winning. Specifically, when the push order combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation order is notified, and when the chance combination is internally won in the AT state, the stop operation timing (suggestion of the internally won combination) is notified. Since the operation navigation is executed, the player can easily win a predetermined small winning combination by following the stop operation content of the operation navigation. That is, the AT state is a state in which a large profit is given to the player by the operation navigation.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the operation navigation is not executed even if the chance combination or the push order combination is internally won.

In the present embodiment, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the AT state. In the AT lottery, for example, the winning or losing of the winning may be determined based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of digested games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold value (hereinafter referred to as the number of ceiling games), the game shifts to the AT state. That is, when the AT lottery is won in the normal state or when the number of digested games in the normal state reaches the number of ceiling games, the game shifts to the AT state and a predetermined number of AT games is given. In the AT state, an AT additional lottery is performed in which the number of AT games is added, and when the AT additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games are added. On the other hand, in the AT state, when all the assigned AT games are exhausted, the AT state ends and the normal state is entered.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

When the power is turned on to the slot machine 100, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the medal insertion / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether or not there is an electronic medal insertion operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141, and when there is an insertion operation. Turns on the winning line indicator lamp 120 according to the number of inserted medals. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a medal insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals.

Further, a check as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated is performed based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start operation has been performed, the number of inserted medals is determined and the first sub-control unit 400 determines. On the other hand, preparations are made to send a start lever reception command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number value generation circuit 316 is acquired.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for the winning combination is performed. In the internal lottery process of the winning combination, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) for the internally winning combination is activated (the flag of the winning combination is turned ON). Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning combination internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, when the watermelon is internally won, an internal winning command indicating that the watermelon has been internally won is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is lost (the winning combination). In the case of non-winning), an internal winning command indicating a loss is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. The operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of the winning combination whose stop operation order is questioned, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is executed based on the start operation.

In step S108, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is input in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In this step S108, the stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). Prepare to send the stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and the stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation) 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, the winning determination process is performed. In the winning judgment process, the winning judgment of the symbol stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, and when the symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning is won. It is judged that the role has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon has won a prize. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, control for shifting the game state is performed. For example, in the case of a BB prize, preparations are made so that the BB game can be started from the next time. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 5) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S206, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S207, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6A.

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, the effect control process (details will be described later) is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S305, a setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S502, a command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, an effect random number value is updated, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 7A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 518, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S604, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 7A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S802, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S903. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S906, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Playability>
Next, the playability common to the following Examples C1 to C5 will be described. In the present embodiment, the two-card betting game is more disadvantageous to the player than the three-card betting game. Here, the disadvantage means that, specifically, in the two-card betting game, the process for granting the privilege advantageous to the player is not executed. For example, in a two-card betting game, an AT lottery for granting the number of AT games executed in the normal state, an AT additional lottery for granting the number of additional AT games in the AT state, a lottery for shifting to a special zone, etc. It may not be executed, or in the two-card betting game, the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state may not be updated. For this reason, in the two-card betting game, "two-card betting notification", which is an effect of notifying that the two-card betting game is performed, is executed to give the player a warning that the game is being executed with a demerit. ing. As described above, the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a game table on which a three-card betting game is recommended.

<Example C1>
First, with reference to FIG. 8, the production of the three-card betting game and the two-card betting game in Example C1 will be described. FIG. 8A shows an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the three-card betting game, and FIG. 8B is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the two-card bet game. An example of the production is shown.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the three-card betting game, the game number display d1 is updated based on the start lever operation while the predetermined effect image is displayed. For example, the predetermined effect image may be an effect that reflects the result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The game number display d1 is an effect of displaying the number of games in the normal state after the AT state ends. In the C1 embodiment, as described above, when the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches the number of ceiling games, the game is configured to shift to the AT state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the two-card betting game, the two-card betting notification d2 is started to be displayed based on the start lever operation. As described above, the two-card bet notification d2 is a warning effect for notifying that the two-card betting game is a two-card betting game. The two-card bet notification d2 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the entire surface of the effect image display device 157, and is displayed from the start lever operation to the third stop operation. That is, while the two-card bet notification d2 is displayed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. Further, after the third stop operation, the original effect image is returned, but the game number display d1 is not updated. This is because the number of games in the normal state is not updated in the two-card betting game. The game number display d1 is updated when the start lever operation is performed in the next three-card betting game.

In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the two-card bet notification d2 was executed from the start lever operation to the third stop operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first bet notification d2 is performed after the start lever operation. It may be continued until the stop operation or the second stop operation, or may be continued until the bet operation of the next game. Further, the two-card bet notification d2 may be continued for a predetermined time from the start lever operation.

In the following, the case where the start lever operation is performed in the 3-card betting game is referred to as "when the 3-card betting game is executed", and the case where the start lever operation is performed in the 2-card betting game is referred to as "2-card betting". When you play a game. "

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the effect when a three-card betting game is executed after the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state. Specifically, FIG. 9 (a) is a time chart of the game progress when the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state and then the three-card betting game is executed, and FIG. 9 (b) is the pseudo-bonus confirmation in the normal state. An example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the three-card betting game is executed after the notification d3 is executed is shown. The pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and is an effect of notifying the grant of a privilege. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus is the AT state of 30 games, and the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is an effect suggesting that the state shifts to the AT state.

In the C1 embodiment, when the three-card betting game is executed in the next game after the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, the slot machine 100 executes the reel action based on the start lever operation. The reel action is an effect relating to the rotation and stop of the reels 110 to 112. The slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the effective line based on the execution of the reel action, and executes the symbol alignment notification d4. The symbol matching notification d4 is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and is an effect of notifying that a special symbol combination has been prepared by a reel action, that is, notifying that a privilege has been given. ..

Next, the slot machine 100 starts the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and executes the effect d5 indicating that the AT state has been entered. The effect d5 indicating the transition to the AT state is, for example, an image effect displayed on the effect image display device 157, and when the push order combination is internally won in the game, the operation navigation indicating the order of the stop operations. Display the image of.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an outline of an effect when a two-card betting game is executed after executing the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 in a normal state. Specifically, FIG. 10A is a time chart of the game progress when the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state, the two-card betting game is first executed, and then the three-card betting game is executed. (B) is an example of the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed in the normal state, the two-card bet game is first executed, and then the three-card bet game is executed. Shows.

In the C1 embodiment, when the two-card betting game is executed in the next game after the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, the slot machine 100 does not execute the reel action based on the start lever operation, and the two-card betting notification d2. Is to start executing.

As described above, in the embodiment C1, the reel action is reserved and set in the game in which the pseudo-bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, but is not executed when the two-card betting game is executed in the next game. It is designed to be executed when a three-card betting game is executed.

Therefore, when the three-card betting game is executed after the two-card betting game is executed, the slot machine 100 executes the reel action based on the start lever operation. Based on the execution of the reel action, the slot machine 100 displays a special symbol combination (for example, a bonus symbol) on the effective line, ends the two-card bet notification d2, and executes the symbol matching notification d4. That is, as shown in FIG. 10B, the two-card bet notification d2 is continuously executed from the start lever operation of the two-card bet game to the execution of the symbol alignment notification d4 of the three-card bet game. Will be done.

As described above, in the embodiment C1, there is a period in which the two-card bet notification d2 is executed even in the three-card bet game, and the two-card bet executed in the previous two-card bet game in the three-card bet game is executed. After the effect of notifying is continuously executed for a part of the period (in Example C1, the period immediately before the symbol matching is notified by the reel action), the effect of notifying the privilege grant is executed. ..

After the reel action is completed, the slot machine 100 starts the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and executes the effect d5 indicating that the AT state has been entered.

As described above, according to the embodiment C1, since the notification of the two-card betting game is executed in the game for notifying the privilege grant, which is a production that attracts a high degree of attention of the player, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the two-card betting game. ..

In Example C1, the case of a pseudo-bonus was given as an example in which the privilege is given, but in other cases, for example, when an AT game is added, or when the number of acquired cards is added, the special zone is used. Of course, it may be applied in the case of rushing.

Further, in the embodiment C1, the reel action is executed when the three-card betting game is executed after the pseudo bonus confirmation notification d3 is executed, but the effect to be executed is not limited to this. For example, a freeze effect may be executed. The freeze effect is an effect that does not accept the operation of the player for a predetermined time, for example, an effect that the reels 110 to 112 do not start rotating for a predetermined time even if the start lever is operated.

Further, in the embodiment C1, one type of two-card bet notification d2 is executed, but a plurality of types of two-card bet notification d2 are provided, and any one of the two-card bet notification d2 is executed according to the situation. May be good.

Further, the two-card bet notification d2 of the embodiment C1 is only an image effect, and the sound effect that outputs the sound is not executed, but the sound effect may be executed.

<Example C2>
Next, the continuous production of Example C2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 (a) is a time chart showing the flow of continuous production in the three-card betting game, and FIG. 11 (b) shows the production mode of the continuous production displayed on the production image display device 157 in the three-card betting game. An example is shown.

The continuous effect d10 executed in the embodiment C2 is an effect developed over three games, and is an effect expected to give a privilege. Specifically, the continuous effect d10 is executed in the introduction effect d11 executed in the first game of the continuous effect, the drinking comparison effect d12 executed in the second game of the continuous effect, and the third game of the continuous effect. The result effect d13 is composed of. Note that FIG. 11 shows an aspect of continuous effect as an image display effect, but the continuous effect also includes a sound effect for outputting sound and a lamp effect accompanied by lighting of a lamp.

In the first game of the continuous effect d10, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the three-card betting game, for example, the game number display d1 is updated based on the start lever operation. Further, in the result effect d13 of the third game of the continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 11B, the result (win or lose) of the drink comparison effect d12 is displayed, and if the drink comparison is won, the privilege is given. It is supposed to be granted. For example, when the continuous effect d10 is executed in the normal state, the privilege may be a transition to the AT state.

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating another example of the continuous effect in the embodiment C2. FIG. 12A is a time chart showing the flow of continuous production when a 3-card betting game and a 2-card betting game are mixed, and FIG. 12B is a time chart showing a flow of a continuous production, and FIG. 12B is a mixture of a 3-card betting game and a 2-card betting game. In this case, an example of the effect mode of the continuous effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 is shown. Specifically, FIG. 12 shows, assuming that the game in which the continuous production is started is the first game, the first game and the fourth game are three-card betting games, and the second and third games are two-card betting games. It shows the case when it is executed.

Since the first game in which the continuous production is started is the same as the example shown in FIG. 11, the description thereof will be omitted. The second game is a two-card betting game, but the slot machine 100 executes the drinking comparison effect d12 as in FIG. That is, the slot machine 100 does not execute the two-card bet notification d2 even in the two-card bet game, and develops a continuous effect. However, in the drinking comparison effect d12 in this case, no sound is output and only the effect image is displayed. This is to give a penalty to the player who has played the two-card betting game.

As a penalty, the example of the continuous production shown in FIG. 12 shows a case where the player wins in the drinking comparison effect d12 and shifts to the AT state. The player has suffered a loss for the game. Further, although not shown in FIG. 12, if the game is defeated in the drinking comparison effect d12 and the normal state continues, the number of games in the normal state is not updated as described above, so the number of medals inserted is simply used. Not only will it be lost, but the number of ceiling games will be delayed.

Next, the slot machine 100 executes the two-card bet notification d2 in the third game. That is, when two betting games are executed in succession for two games, the continuous production is executed in the first game, and the two-card betting notification d2 is executed in the second game. Specifically, the two-card bet notification d2 is executed from the operation of the start lever in the third game to the operation of the third stop. That is, the continuous production is not executed in the third game.

Next, in the fourth game, the slot machine 100 executes the result effect d13 corresponding to the third game of the continuous effect. When the two-card betting game is executed while the continuous production is being executed in this way, the two-card betting notification d2 for calling attention is executed, and as a result, the period for executing the continuous production is extended.

In the two-card betting game, as described above, the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state is not updated. We are trying to make adjustments to prolong the period of fanning the player.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, since the notification of the two-card betting game is executed during the execution of the continuous production, the player can be given a sense of discomfort, and the attention of the two-card betting game can be emphasized.

FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the continuous effect in the embodiment C2. FIG. 13 shows a modified example of the effect mode of the continuous effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 when the three-card bet game and the two-card bet game are mixed.

In the example shown in FIG. 12, the slot machine 100 executes the two-card bet notification d2 in the third game, but the period for executing the two-card bet notification d2 is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the slot machine 100 may execute the two-card bet notification d2 after the second stop operation of the second game. That is, a part of the drinking comparison effect d12 may be executed in a part of the period of the second game, and then the two-card bet notification d2 may be executed in the remaining period of the second game. In this case, there is a part in which the drinking comparison effect d12 is not executed in the second game.

As described above, according to the modified example of the embodiment C2, since the continuous effect d10 and the two-card bet notification d2 coexist in one game, it is possible to further emphasize the attention of the two-card bet game.

<Example C3>
Next, the two-card bet notification d2 executed in the embodiment C3 will be described with reference to FIG. In the embodiment C3, there are two types of two-card bet notification d2. One is a two-card bet notification d2A executed in a state where the bonus role has not been internally won and there is no possibility of winning the bonus role (hereinafter referred to as the first state), and the other is. This is a two-card bet notification d2B executed in a state in which the bonus combination is internally won and there is a possibility of winning the bonus combination (hereinafter referred to as the second state).

FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of the display mode of the two-card bet notification d2A displayed on the effect image display device 157, and FIG. 14 (c) shows the two-sheet bet displayed on the effect image display device 157. An example of the display mode of the notification d2B is shown. The two-card bet notification d2A and the two-card bet notification d2B are at least partially the same (for example, the display wording "! Two-card betting game in progress!"), But the display mode, color, and size are displayed. , The display area, etc. are different. For example, the two-card bet notification d2A may be an effect image displayed over the entire screen, and the two-sheet bet notification d2B may be an effect image displayed in a part of the screen. Further, the colors of the background images may be different while the contents of the background images of the two-card bet notification d2A and the two-card bet notification d2B are the same.

By the way, in Example C3, if a bonus role is won in a two-card betting game, the game shifts to a disadvantageous bonus game. The disadvantageous bonus game is, for example, if the AT lottery is not executed during the bonus game, the AT additional lottery is not executed during the bonus game, or the bonus game ends with the specified number of medals paid out, the number of medals paid out becomes the specified number. It is a bonus game that requires a large number of medals to be inserted before reaching it, the medals do not increase substantially, and a large number of digestion games are required to finish the bonus game.

Therefore, when the two-card bet notification d2B is executed in the second state in the second embodiment, the chance combination notification d21 is executed in order to avoid the bonus combination winning, as shown in FIG. 14 (c). The chance combination notification d21 is one of the above-mentioned operation navigations.

Here, to explain the chance combination notification d21, when the chance combination (specifically, cherry, watermelon) is internally won in the AT state, the slot machine 100 notifies the chance combination as shown in FIG. 14A. Execute d21. The chance combination notification d21 is a production image suggesting that the chance combination has been internally elected. By recognizing this effect image, the player performs a stop operation aiming at the cherry pattern. As a result, it is configured to facilitate the winning of the chance role.

On the other hand, the chance combination notification d21, which is executed together with the two-card bet notification d2B in the second state, is also executed in order to make the player perform a stop operation aiming at the cherry symbol. This is because the player aims at the cherry pattern by recognizing the effect image of the chance combination notification d21 as in the case of FIG. 14A. As a result of this stop operation, it is possible to avoid winning the bonus role.

FIG. 15 (a) is a diagram showing a transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the two-card betting game is executed in the first state, and FIG. 15 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode in the second state. It is a figure which shows the transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the piece betting game is executed. In either case, from the start lever operation of the two-card betting game to the third stop operation, the two-card bet notification d2 (in the first state, the two-card bet notification d2A, in the second state, the two-card bet notification d2A). , 2 bet notification d2B) is displayed.

While the two-card bet notification d2 is being displayed, the original effect image (hereinafter referred to as a background image) is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.

As described above, according to the embodiment C3, since the two-card bet notification d2B can be conspicuous in the two-card betting game that avoids winning the bonus role, the game that requires special attention in the two-card betting game is emphasized and notified. be able to.

FIG. 16A shows an image of a modified example of the two-card bet notification d2A. As shown in FIG. 16A, the background image may be left and the two bet notification d2A may be displayed on the background image. That is, it is not necessary to display the two-card bet notification d2A over the entire screen of the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 16B shows an image of a modified example of the two-card bet notification d2B. As shown in FIG. 16B, the background image may be left and the two-card bet notification d2B and the chance combination notification d21 may be displayed on the background image.

Further, as in the case of adopting the two-card bet notification d2A shown in FIG. 16A and the two-card bet notification d2B shown in FIG. 16B, the contents (wording, color, size, etc.) of both notification images are used. May be the same, and the display positions of the two may be different.

The two-card bet notification d2B as shown in FIG. 16C may be adopted. That is, if a part of the wording of the two-card bet notification d2A and the two-card bet notification d2B are the same (for example, two), the wording of both may not be completely the same.

<Example C4>
Next, the button effect of Example C4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the embodiment C4, the button effect may be executed in the three-card betting game in the normal state. The button effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 192 after the third stop operation, and when the operation to the effect button 192 is performed, the result suggesting the winning or non-winning of the privilege grant is displayed. be. In addition, the privilege grant in Example C4 specifically means the transition to the AT state.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a transition of the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the button effect is executed in the three-card betting game.

As shown in FIG. 17, the button effect includes a start display d30, an operation promotion display d31, and an operation response display d32. The start display d30 is a display for notifying the start of the button effect, and is displayed after the third stop operation. The operation promotion display d31 is displayed after the end of the start display d30 after the third stop operation, and is a display prompting the operation of the effect button 192. The operation response display d32 is a display suggesting the result of granting the privilege based on the operation of the effect button 192. The operation response display d32 includes an operation response display d32A that suggests winning of the privilege grant and an operation response display d32B that suggests that the privilege grant is not won. If the effect button 192 is not operated, the operation response display d32 is not executed.

When the operation response display d32A is displayed in the button effect, that is, when the privilege is given, the AT start displaying the wording indicating the privilege grant (for example, "bonus confirmation") based on the start lever operation of the next game. Image d33A is displayed.

On the other hand, when the operation response display d32B is displayed in the button effect, that is, when the privilege is not given, the normal image d33B, which is the background image in the normal state, is displayed based on the start lever operation of the next game.

FIG. 18 shows a change in the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when one game is executed in the next game after the button effect is started in the three-card bet game, and then the three-card bet game is executed. It is a figure which shows. Note that FIG. 18 shows an example in which the effect button 192 is not operated in the button effect and the privilege is given.

When the next game in which the operation promotion display d31 is displayed in the button effect is a two-card betting game, the slot machine 100 executes the two-card betting notification d2 based on the start lever operation. The two-card bet notification d2 is displayed from the start lever operation to the third stop operation.

Next, the slot machine 100 executes the start display d30 after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game. The start display d30 is continuously displayed until the start lever operation of the three-card betting game, which is the next game.

Next, the slot machine 100 displays the AT start image d33A based on the start lever operation of the three-card betting game, which is the next game. That is, the start display d30 is continuously displayed until the start lever operation of the three-card betting game after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game, but after that, the operation promotion display d31 and the operation response display d32A are not displayed. , AT start image d33A is suddenly displayed.

As described above, in the embodiment C4, the start display d30 is continuously displayed until the start lever operation of the three-card betting game after the third stop operation of the two-card betting game, but the operation promotion display d31 is not executed. Even if the effect button 192 is operated during the period from the third stop operation of the two-card bet game to the start lever operation of the three-card bet game, the operation on the effect button 192 is not effective and the operation response. The display d32 is also not executed.

As described above, according to the embodiment C4, when the next game after the button effect is executed is a two-card bet game, even if the three-card bet game is executed thereafter, a part of the button effect is not executed. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the two-card betting game.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the two-card bet notification d2 was executed from the start lever operation of the two-card bet game to the third stop operation, but the two-card bet notification d2 was operated by the start lever of the two-card bet game. You may execute up to the third stop operation of the three-card betting game. Further, it is not necessary to execute the two-card bet notification d2 in the two-card bet game. That is, a configuration without the second two-card bet notification d2 shown in FIG. 18 may be adopted so that a part of the button effect is not executed. Not executing a part of the button effect functions as a warning notification that the game is a two-card betting game.

Further, in the embodiment C4, the operation response display d32 is not executed when the next game after the button effect is executed is the two-card betting game, but the operation response display d32 is executed after the button effect is executed. The case of not doing so is not limited to this. For example, it may be applied to the case of opening the door (for example, the case where the clerk opens the door or the case of fraudulent activity), and the operation response display d32 may not be executed.

Further, when a plurality of types of button effects having different execution triggers are provided, the operation response display d32 may not be executed when the two-card betting game is executed for any of the button effects. Of the plurality of types of button effects, some of the button effects may execute the operation response display d32 in the subsequent three-card bet game even when the two-card bet game is executed.

<Example C5>
In the fifth embodiment, the notification period of the two-card bet notification d2 will be described in detail. FIG. 19 (a) is a time chart showing the notification period of the two-card bet notification d2 in the two-card betting game, and FIG. 19 (b) shows the effect displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the two-card bet game. It is a figure which shows an example of the production mode.

Although it has been described that the two-card bet notification d2 is executed from the start lever operation of the two-card bet game to the third stop operation in the above Examples C1 to C4, to be exact, FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b). As shown in the above, the two-card bet notification d2 is executed from the time when a predetermined time elapses to the third stop operation after the start lever operation. After the third stop operation, an image of the effect executed before the start lever operation of the two-card bet game, that is, an image of the effect displayed in the three-card bet game (hereinafter referred to as a normal image) is displayed. To. Since the two-card bet notification d2 is displayed over the entire screen of the effect image display device 157, when the two-card bet notification d2 is executed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the normal image.

In the two-card betting game in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 19B, the game number display d1 is performed, but the game number display d1 is not updated. The number of games shown in the number of games display d1 is the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state, and when the number of games reaches the number of ceiling games (for example, 700 games), the AT state is given as a pseudo bonus. The migration takes place. Therefore, the game number display d1 that is not updated can be said to be a penalty notification regarding the granting of benefits to the player.

Here, the notification timings of the game number display d1 and the two-card bet notification d2 in the two-card bet game are different. Specifically, in the two-card betting game, after the start lever is operated, the game number display d1 is first executed, and then the two-card betting notification d2 is executed. As a result, the player has the effect of easily recognizing the penalty notification.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the display area of the two-card bet notification d2 is configured to be larger than the display area of the game number display d1.

As described above, according to the embodiment C5, in the two-card betting game, the execution timings of the two-card betting notification d2 for notifying that the two-card betting game is used and the game number notification d1 for notifying the number of games in the normal state are different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking each notification and to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game has been given a penalty.

Next, a modified example of the notification period of the two-card bet notification d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a) and 20 (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a two-card betting game.

As shown in FIG. 20A, the two-card bet notification d2 is executed from the time after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start lever operation of the two-card bet game until the three-card bet is made in the next game. You may.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the two-card bet notification d2 may be started immediately after the start lever operation of the two-card bet game and may end when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start lever operation. After that, as shown in FIG. 20B, the game number display d1A (for example, the display area, display position, color, etc. are different from the game number display d1) that emphasizes that the number of games has not been changed is stopped for the third time. The operation may be executed. That is, in the two-card betting game, after the start lever is operated, the two-card betting notification d2 may be executed first, and then the game number display d1 may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the two-card bet notification d2 may be executed again from the third stop operation until the three-card bet is made in the next game. That is, the two-card bet notification d2 and the game number display d1 may be repeatedly displayed.

Next, a modified example of the display area of the two-card bet notification d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (a). FIG. 21A is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the effect image display device 157 in a two-card betting game.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the two-card bet notification d2 may be displayed on a part of the screen of the effect image display device 157. In this case, the normal image and the number of games display d1 may be displayed in the display area outside the two-card bet notification d2. That is, the two bet notification d2 and the game number display d1 may be simultaneously displayed in different display areas of one display device. Further, in this case, the display area of the two-card bet notification d2 and the display area of the game number display d1 may be displayed so as to overlap each other.

Next, a modified example in which the two-card bet notification d2 and the game number display d12 are displayed on different display devices will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the sub effect image display device 195 in the two-card betting game.

FIG. 21B shows a modified example in which the two-card bet notification d2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the game number display d1 is displayed on the sub effect image display device 195. In this case, during the period from the start lever operation to the third stop operation of the two-card betting game, the highlighted game number display d1A (for example, the color and wording are different from the game number display d1) is displayed as a sub-effect image display device 195. It may be displayed in.

Although the execution end timings of the game number display d1 and the two-card bet notification d2 are different as shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, they may be the same.

Although the embodiments C1 to C5 of the present embodiment have been described above, the embodiments of the present embodiment are not limited to this, and each embodiment may be combined and configured.

<Summary of embodiments>
(1) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C1),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table
A game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game") is recommended.
The effect means is the first to notify that the second bet number is the second bet number game in the game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). It is a means that can execute the production (for example, the two-card bet notification d2).
The effect means is a case where the first effect is executed for at least a part of a period of a certain first bet number game (hereinafter, referred to as "predetermined game") (hereinafter, "first case"). (For example, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)),
This is the first basic configuration.

According to this first basic configuration, in a certain first bet number game, the first effect of notifying that the bet number is the second bet may be executed, so that the second bet number game may be executed. Attention can be emphasized.

In the first basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of performing a second effect (for example, symbol alignment notification d4) in the predetermined game.
In the first case, the effect means executes the second effect after executing the first effect (for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B).
This is the first suitable configuration.

According to the first preferred configuration, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized by continuously executing the first effect and the second effect.

In the first preferred configuration above
The predetermined game is a game accompanied by a reel action.
The effect means executes the first effect during the execution of the reel action in the predetermined game, and starts executing the second effect in connection with the end of the reel action (for example, FIG. 10 (see FIG. 10). a) and (b)),
This is the second preferred configuration.

According to the second preferred configuration, the execution of the reel action can emphasize the alerting of the second bet number game.

In the second preferred configuration above
The reel action is reserved for execution in a game prior to the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as "reserved game").
When the game set as the reserved game is the second bet number game, the reel action is not executed, and then the game that becomes the first bet number game is the reel action in the predetermined game. Is executed (eg, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)),
This is the third preferred configuration.

According to the third preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game and notify that the first bet number game is the recommended game.

In the first basic configuration, the first suitable configuration, the second suitable configuration, or the third suitable configuration.
The predetermined game is a game for notifying a player of advantageous benefits (for example, transition from a normal state to an AT state, addition of an AT game, etc.).
This is the fourth preferred configuration.

According to the fourth preferred configuration, it is possible to call attention to the second bet number game in a game that is important to the player.

In the first basic configuration, the first suitable configuration, the second suitable configuration, the third suitable configuration, or the fourth suitable configuration.
The first case occurs in at least a part of the game immediately after the second bet number game (for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B).
This is the fifth preferred configuration.

According to the fifth preferred configuration, since the first effect is executed immediately after the second bet number game, it can be clearly understood that it is a reminder for the second bet number game.

(2) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C2),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a first effect of notifying that the second bet number is the second bet number in a game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). (For example, a two-card bet notification d2) is a means that can be executed.
The effect means executes a second effect (for example, a drink comparison effect d12 of the continuous effect d10) during at least a part of the period of the second bet number game (hereinafter referred to as “predetermined game”). (Hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b)).
This is the second basic configuration.

According to this second basic configuration, since the second effect may be executed in a certain second bet number game, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized.

In the second basic configuration above,
The effect means is a means capable of performing a continuous effect (for example, continuous effect d10) over a plurality of games (for example, three games).
The game immediately before the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as “immediately before game”) is the first bet number game.
When the immediately preceding game and the predetermined game are performed during the execution of the continuous effect, the effect means executes a part of the continuous effect over a plurality of games in the immediately preceding game, and the predetermined game. It is a means for executing the second effect as a part of the continuous effect for at least a part of the period (for example, FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)).
This is the sixth preferred configuration.

According to the sixth preferred configuration, the second effect may be executed during the execution of the continuous effect, so that the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized.

In the sixth preferred configuration above,
When the game next to the predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as "next game") is the second bet number game, the effect means executes the first effect in the next game, and the effect is described. It is a means that does not execute the second effect (for example, FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b)).
This is the seventh preferred configuration.

According to the seventh preferred configuration, since the first effect is executed and the second effect is not executed during the continuous effect, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized.

In the sixth preferred configuration or the seventh preferred configuration, the continuous effect is an effect including at least a display effect for displaying an image and a sound effect for outputting sound.
In the first case, the effect means is a means for executing the display effect and not executing the sound effect during a part of the continuous effect.
This is the eighth preferred configuration.

According to the eighth preferred configuration, since the sound effect is not executed during the continuous effect, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game as a penalty.

Benefits advantageous to the player in the second basic configuration, the sixth preferred configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, or the eighth preferred configuration (eg, transition from normal state to AT state, AT game). It is provided with a privilege-related processing means (for example, a main control unit 300, etc.) that executes a process related to (addition, etc.) (hereinafter referred to as a privilege-related process).
In the first case, the privilege-related processing means is a means that does not execute the privilege-related processing in the predetermined game.
This is the ninth preferred configuration.

According to the ninth preferred configuration, in the first case, since the privilege-related processing is not executed, it is possible to call attention to the second bet number game.

(3) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C3),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is the first to notify that the game is the second bet number game in the game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"). It is a means capable of executing the effect (for example, the two-card bet notification d2A) or the second effect (for example, the two-card bet notification d2B) for notifying that the second bet number game is used.
The first effect is at least partially the same as the second effect (for example, FIGS. 14 and 15).
This is the third basic configuration.

According to this third basic configuration, since the first effect or the second effect is executed in the second bet number game, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game.

In the third basic configuration above,
In the case of the second bet number game and the first state (for example, a state in which the bonus combination cannot be won), the effect means can execute the first effect.
In the case of the second betting number game and the second state (for example, a state in which a bonus combination can be won), the effect means can execute the second effect.
This is the tenth preferred configuration.

According to the tenth preferred configuration, since the first effect or the second effect is executed depending on the state of the second bet number game, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game. can.

In the tenth preferred configuration above
The first effect and the second effect are display effects for displaying an image.
The first effect and the second effect are effects that are partially different in at least one of a display mode, a display area, a color, or a size.
This is the eleventh suitable configuration.

According to the eleventh preferred configuration, since the first effect and the second effect have different effect modes, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game.

In the tenth preferred configuration or the eleventh preferred configuration.
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
An internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, winning combination internal lottery process S105) that determines the result of the internal winning based on the lottery information.
A winning determination means (for example, a main control unit 300, a winning determination process S109) that determines a winning based on the result of the internal winning result determining means and the stopping mode of the plurality of reels.
Equipped with
The first state is a state in which there is no possibility that a certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) will win in the second betting number game.
The second state is a state in which the certain internal winning combination (for example, a bonus combination) may win in the second betting number game.
If a player wins a certain internal winning combination in the second state, a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, an AT lottery is not executed, the number of games is not updated, medals are not increased, or the like is a bonus game. ) Occurs,
This is the twelfth suitable configuration.

According to the twelfth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize a game that requires special attention in a two-card betting game.

(4) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C4),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect (for example, a button effect) in the first bet number game.
The effect means is a game (hereinafter, "second game") in which the second bet number is set and executed from the next game (hereinafter, referred to as "next game") in which the first effect is started to be executed. When one or more games (hereinafter referred to as "bet number game") are executed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), this is a means for not executing a part of the first effect (for example, FIGS. 17 and 18). ),
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to this fourth basic configuration
In the fourth basic configuration, by not executing a part of the first effect, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game.

The first effect is an effect that suggests whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player.
This is the thirteenth suitable configuration.

According to the thirteenth preferred configuration, some of the first effects that are advantageous to the player are not performed, so that the alerting of the second bet number game can be emphasized while giving a penalty.

In the thirteenth preferred configuration above
A predetermined operating means (for example, an effect button 192) provided at a position where the player can operate is provided.
The first effect is an operation promotion effect (for example, operation promotion display d31) that prompts an operation for the predetermined operation means, and an operation response effect (for example, an operation response) that is executed based on the operation in the operation promotion effect. It is a production including display d32) and.
In the first case, the effect means is a means that does not execute the operation response effect (for example, FIG. 18).
This is the 14th preferred configuration.

According to the fourteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation response effect is not executed.

In the above 14th preferred configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for receiving a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139).
Equipped with
The effect means is a means capable of executing a second effect (for example, a two-card bet notification d2) for notifying that the second bet number game is a part of the period of the second bet number game. can be,
In the first case, the effect means executes the second effect until the final stop operation (for example, a third stop operation) for the plurality of reels is received in the second bet number game. After the final stop operation, the first effect is executed, but the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect, which are part of the first effect, are not executed, and then the first bet. It is a means for notifying the result of whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player in several games (for example, FIG. 18).
This is the fifteenth suitable configuration.

According to the fifteenth preferred configuration, it is possible to emphasize the attention of the second bet number game while giving a penalty that the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect are not executed.

In the fifteenth preferred configuration above
The effect means is a means for executing the operation promotion effect after receiving the last stop operation in the first bet number game (for example, FIG. 17).
This is the 16th preferred configuration.

According to the sixteenth preferred configuration, the player's expectation can be improved after the final stop operation of the first bet number game.

(5) As described above, according to the game console (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, Example C5),
It is possible to set any bet number among a plurality of bets including a first bet number (for example, 3 bets) and a second bet number less than the first bet number (for example, 2 bets). Bet number setting means (for example, medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, medal insertion port 141, main control unit 300, medal insertion start operation reception process S102).
A game execution means (for example, a main control unit 300, a main control unit main process, a main control unit timer interrupt process) that executes a game based on the bet number set by the bet number setting means.
Effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, first sub control unit main process, second sub control unit). Main processing etc.) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is recommended to be a game in which the first bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first bet number game").
The effect means is a game in which the second bet number is set and executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second bet number game"), and the first effect regarding the penalty (for example, the game number display d1). , A second effect (for example, two-card bet notification d2) for notifying that the second bet number game is performed, is a means that can be executed.
The execution start timing of the first effect is different from the execution start timing of the second effect (for example, FIGS. 19 to 21).
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to this fifth basic configuration, in the second bet number game, the execution start timing of the execution start timing of the first effect regarding the penalty and the second effect notifying that the second effect is the second bet number game is set. Since it is different, it is possible to notify that it is a penalty for the second bet number game and to call attention to the second bet number game from the next time onward.

In the fifth basic configuration above,
A game count updating means for updating the game count (for example, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, etc.) and
When the number of games updated by the game number update means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of ceiling games), a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, transition from a normal state to an AT state) is given. Benefit granting means (for example, main control unit 300, etc.) and
Equipped with
The first effect is a notification effect (for example, game number display d1) for notifying the number of games.
The game number update means is a means for not updating the game number when the second bet number game is executed.
The effect means executes the first effect in which the number of games is not updated when the second bet number game is executed (for example, FIGS. 19 to 21).
This is the 17th preferred configuration.

According to the seventeenth preferred configuration, it can be clarified that it is a penalty for the second bet number game.

In the 17th preferred configuration above
A game start means (for example, a start lever 135, a main control unit 300) that accepts a game start operation is provided.
The game number update means is a means for updating the game number in connection with the game start operation.
In the second betting number game, the effect means is provided with a period during which the game start means does not update the number of games as the first effect after the game start means receives the game start operation. Performing the second effect (eg, FIGS. 19-21),
This is the 18th preferred configuration.

According to the eighteenth preferred configuration, the attention of the second bet number game can be emphasized by continuously executing the first effect and the second effect.

In the fifth basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, or the eighteenth preferred configuration.
The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect by using the first effect device (for example, effect image display device 157, sub effect image display device 195).
The effect means is a means capable of performing the second effect using a second effect device (for example, an effect image display device 157).
The first effect device and the second effect device are the same or different effect devices.
This is the 19th preferred configuration.

According to the nineteenth preferred configuration, the first effect and the second effect can be conspicuous.

In the fifth basic configuration, the seventeenth preferred configuration, the eighteenth preferred configuration, or the nineteenth preferred configuration.
It is equipped with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven.
The effect means ends the second effect being executed after all the plurality of reels have stopped in the second bet number game.
This is the 20th preferred configuration.

According to the twentieth preferred configuration, the second effect is executed until all the reels are stopped, so that the second effect can be conspicuous.

<Other game consoles>
The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and the game medium in this case includes electronic data corresponding to medals, and is a game medium. Insertion is performed from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device having a function of storing the number of rented medals electronically and a function of storing the number of medals won by winning an electronic method). The payout of the game medium includes outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and variations to the embodiments of the present invention can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications can be made and those accompanied by such modifications and alterations are also within the technical scope of the invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment A1]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 22 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110-112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the internal lottery for the winning combination, which will be described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification that the bonus confirmation is announced. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a production button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a push order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamps to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 23 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Below, three reels 110-112 are arranged. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board that houses the first sub control board that constitutes the first sub control unit. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each into a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, and the like, which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), the upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing positions, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main process of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the input operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (a). It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110-112, a plurality of types (8 types in the present embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in the present embodiment). Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the frame number 19 on the left reel 110 is a "bell symbol", the frame number 19 on the middle reel 111 is a "blank symbol", and the frame number 18 on the right reel 112 is "seven 2". "Design", are arranged respectively. In the following, "Seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "blue 7 (design)", and "seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "red 7 (design)".

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (b). FIG. 25B is a diagram showing a winning line of the slot machine according to the embodiment A1 of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is on the upper stage symbol of the left reel, and on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2). The displayed symbol is the middle symbol on the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower symbol of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the lower symbol on the left reel and the upper symbol of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed in the middle reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle stage symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). The displayed symbol is the upper symbol on the right reel, the symbol displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 (9 shown in the figure). The symbols displayed at (position; also referred to as symbol position 9) are called the lower symbols on the right reel, and each symbol on each reel 110-112 is vertically three on each reel 110-112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of the middle winning line L1 composed of the left reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 2), the middle reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 5), and the right reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to the winning combination described in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), which will be described later. It is a line that determines whether or not a combination is displayed. FIG. 25B shows the middle prize line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can play a 3-card or 2-card bet, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid and the number of medals is 3 or 2. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a bet is made. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines that go up to the right may be set as valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b). The figure (a) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) is a diagram showing the type of winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2), a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13, small role 1 to small role 5), and the like. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles for shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination 1, The prizes for the special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 13 are included.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out due to winning the role itself. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 (BB1) is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2", and the special role 2 (BB2) is "BAR-BAR-Seven 1".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). ..

This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1 or the special role 2, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special). If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2. Further, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 winning cards by BB1 and 55 winning cards by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special gaming state (RT4) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 13)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay 2 (directed replay 1), and replay 3 for replay. (Direction replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 26, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 5)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 (cherry), small role. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 26, such as "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination described later), and the selected reel stop is performed. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed together on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display all the symbol combinations of any winning combination on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, when a certain winning combination is internally won or when a special winning combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be a winning line. Does not stop at.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of frames drawn in, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example in which the prohibition control is performed, for example, the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 27A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-based gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT system gaming state), and according to the AT system gaming state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 27 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the conditional device related to the replaying combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 28A is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. For this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one winning combination are prepared, and a staff member of a game store or the like can arbitrarily select and set any setting value. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest among other game states (for example, a game state excluding a special game state) (disadvantageous to the player), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 28 (a).

Re-game The winning combination that is internally won in the low probability state is special role 1 (condition device No. 1. only for 3-card betting game), special role 2 (not shown, only for 2-card betting game), and re-game combination 1 (replaying game). Conditional device No. 2), replay combination 2,4-10 (conditional device No.3), regame combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13 (conditional device No.4), small combination 1 to small There is a combination 5 (condition device No. 5-9). If the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "missing". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning the loss".

Here, "re-game role 2, 4 to 10" means re-game role 2, re-game role 4, re-game role 5, re-game role 6, re-game role 7, re-game role 8, re-game role 9 , And the replaying combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110-112, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 5, the re-gaming combination 6, the re-gaming combination 7, the re-gaming combination 8. The symbol combination corresponding to any one of the replay combination 9 and the replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. In addition, a combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

In addition, "re-gaming combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means re-gaming combination 3, re-gaming combination 4, re-gaming combination 6, re-gaming combination 8, re-gaming combination 10, and re-gaming combination 11. , Re-game combination 12, and re-game combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer operation order which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110-112, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 6, the re-gaming combination 8, the re-gaming combination 10, the re-gaming combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 11, the re-game combination 12, and the re-game combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 28 (FIG. 28). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "Bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

In addition, when "small role 4" is composed of "small role 4a" and "small role 4b" and the "small role 4a" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is selected according to the operation order of the player. Is determined whether or not is displayed on the winning line, but if the "small winning combination 4b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured to be.

Here, the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 4" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 28 (b). To be precise, "small role 4" is "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small roles 4". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small winning combinations 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 4LCR" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 27 (a) shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the system shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later. It is shown that when the special role 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player stops the operation at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 28A. The winning roles that are internally won in the special role internal winning state include re-game combination 1, re-game combination 2,4-10, re-game role 3,4,6,8,10-13, small role 1-small role 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Further, in FIG. 27 (a), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is performed. It has been shown to transition to state (RT4).

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states. In the special gaming state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 28 (a). In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 5. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 27 (a) shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of sheets is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, if more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the special gaming state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, when more than 55 medals are paid out, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is entered. ..

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of payouts are executed, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when there is a prize (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) of games are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 27 (a) is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27B is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT-type gaming states are roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode. Here, the operation navigation is internally elected as a push order combination (in this example, a replay combination 2,4 to 10, a replay combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, or a small combination 4). In this case, it refers to the effect of notifying the operation order of the correct answer. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (b) and 29. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 28B is a diagram illustrating a correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine according to the embodiment A1 of the present invention, and FIG. 29 corresponds the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a figure.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, when the "re-game combination 2,4-10" or the "re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10-13" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 and displays the effect image. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the character “−-1”) suggesting that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 is the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel. In the data and display data 07 suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting a stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The image to be reeled (for example, the character "213") is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replaying combination or the small winning combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the operation to stop the correct answer of the small winning combination 4 may be set to three options as in the replaying combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the operation of stopping the correct answer of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 4, and the re-game combination may also be configured to be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings a favorable result to the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet number when playing a game for a predetermined period. The ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), for example, the transition is made in the order of the finalized notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and the judge state is changed to the normal gaming state or AT2 state via the pullback state. There are routes and routes that directly shift from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games). Further, although the details will be described later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 27B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 27 (b), each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state has a normal state, and the high navigation state effect state has a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. In addition, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls to be ejected increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 30.

FIG. 30A illustrates an image of an effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 or RAM 408 shown in FIG. 24) of the first sub-control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400 has an effect information (for example, an effect state, a high navigation state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main process described later. The effect state counter, etc.) is acquired, and in the subsequent effect control process (step S3605), the effect table corresponding to the effect state, etc. is referred to, and the effect according to the effect state counter, etc. is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the AT1 effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the judge effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 30B is a diagram showing an example of a judge state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, the judge state effect table as shown in FIG. 30B, and is currently present. Judge production corresponding to points and production status counters is performed.

Specifically, when the effect is controlled according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (1), when the point is 1, the enemy character is A → A → A → B (expectation is A). A judge effect that changes in the order of <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, a judge effect that changes the enemy character in the order of A → A → B → B is performed. Further, when the effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (2), when the value of the effect state counter is N (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N), the effect mode is D1. A judge effect is performed by changing the number of -1 → D2-1 → D3-1 → ..., and when the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the effect mode is set. Judge production is performed by changing the turn of D1-2 → D2-2 → D3-2 → ....

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 30C is a diagram showing an example of an LMT state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. 30 (c) and sets the counter to the counter. It is determined whether or not the corresponding trigger (start condition, end condition, etc. of the production) has arrived, and when the trigger has arrived, the production corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when performing effect control according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135. When the pressing operation (rebaon) of is accepted, the current setting value is selected from a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3 using the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (2). A predetermined effect is selected, processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image) is executed.

Further, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (2) is displayed. A predetermined effect is selected from a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect B is performed. (For example, the background image of the end screen) is executed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the case of a two-card betting game, when a control for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) is performed in the interlocking effect, the effect state is performed by the main control unit 300. Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continuously displays the scene corresponding to the value of the same effect state counter. The control method for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect is not limited to this example, and is interlocked with, for example, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. It may be configured not to send a command for displaying a subsequent scene in the production.

The effect mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example, and are, for example, according to the current effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) as shown in FIG. 30 (d). Then, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, with reference to FIG. 31, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 31 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is shown. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, the effect state control process A related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the effect processing is executed. In this effect processing, various effects are controlled.

In step S108, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop data stop table is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, the stop button reception commands relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation for the first stop operation). Prepare to send the stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and the stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation) 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small role 3 (Bell). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

In step S113, the effect state control process B related to the control of the AT system gaming state described above is executed. In step S114, the high navigation state end processing related to the end of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 32) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S2003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S2006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S2007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out to monitor the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. Note that FIG. 33A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 33B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 33 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (a).

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state, respectively.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing is performed in which a command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 33A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, a command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, an effect random number value is updated, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. Note that FIG. 34A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 34B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 34 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 34 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 34 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 34A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, the effect random number value is updated.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Operation means>
Next, the operation means provided in the game console according to the present embodiment will be described.

A plurality of game consoles according to the present embodiment include at least a first operating means provided at a position where the player can operate and a second operating means provided at a position where the player can operate. It is configured to have the operation means of. The operating means is at least a means that can be operated by the player. As an example of the operating means, for example, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the bet button 130, the bet button 131, the effect button (bet button) 132, the medal return button 133, and the settlement button 134 described with reference to FIG. 22 are used. In addition, a touch panel and the like may be mentioned, and the first operating means and the second operating means can be configured by any combination of any two of these operating means.

The operation means may be composed of a plurality of operation units (for example, four buttons for up / down / left / right and one decision button), and in this case, all of the plurality of operation units (four buttons for up / down / left / right). One decision button) may be defined as an operating means, or at least one of a plurality of operating units (for example, two upper and lower buttons or one decision button) may be defined as an operating means. good. Further, when a plurality of effect buttons (including operation means for effect other than the buttons) are provided, any two of these effect buttons can be used in combination.

Further, the operating means can be in a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state different from the first state. For example, when the operating means includes an optical output means capable of outputting light, the first state is one of the states such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of the optical output means, and the second state is the optical output means. Is one of lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc., which is different from the first state.

Further, for example, when the operating means includes the movable means, the first state is that the movable means is any of vibration, rotation, ascent, descent, reciprocating motion, and the like, and the second state is that the movable means is. It is a state different from the first state in any of the states such as vibration, rotation, ascent, descent, and reciprocating motion.

Further, for example, when the operating means includes a display means, the first state is a state in which the display means is displaying a certain display, and the second state is a display in which the display means is different from a certain display. May be displayed, the first state is a state in which the display means is displaying a certain display, and the second state is a state in which the display means is displaying a certain display. It may be in a non-existent state (or a state in which a part of a certain display is displayed).

Further, for example, when the operation request display for prompting the operation by the operating means is performed, the first state is the state in which the first operation request display is displayed at the time of the operation by the operating means, and the second state is. , A state in which a second operation request display different from the first operation request display may be displayed and different from the first state at the time of operation by the operation means may be displayed, or the first state may be displayed. Is a state in which the operation request display is displayed at the time of operation by the operating means, and the second state may be a state in which the operation request display is not displayed at the time of operation by the operating means.

<Continuous hit production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, various effects in continuous hitting will be described.

Here, the continuous hitting effect is an effect of notifying the player about the privilege advantageous to the player, and is an example of the "first certain effect" according to the present invention. As "privileges advantageous to the player", for example, an AT game is added, the number of medals won is added, an AT winning judge such as a bonus or a pseudo bonus is given from normal times, various lottery is given, and the player is given. Transition to an advantageous state (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.) can be mentioned.

In this continuous striking effect (a certain first effect), the first effect (in this example, the total notification TG) corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) can be started. At the same time, the second effect (in this example, the privilege grant effect SG) corresponding to the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) can be started.

<First production in continuous hitting production (total notification)>
35 (a) (1) to 35 (a) (4) are diagrams showing an example in which the first effect (total notification) is started in the continuous striking effect in chronological order.

The effects shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (1) indicate the start of the continuous hitting effect, and in this example, the continuous hitting effect is started with the third stop operation as a trigger.

In the continuous striking effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to blink the button image (operation request display) BG that imitates the appearance of the effect button (first operation means) 132, and above the button image BG. , By displaying the instruction image (operation request display) IG including the characters of "continuous hit", the operation request display requesting the player to operate the effect button 132 multiple times (continuously hit the effect button 132) is displayed. Is going.

Although not shown, the LED (light output) included in the effect button (first operating means) 132 (not shown) is provided during the period when the operation request display (button image BG and instruction image IG in this example) is displayed. By executing the effect of blinking the effect), the effect button (first operating means) 132 is shifted to the first state (blinking state).

On the other hand, in this continuous striking effect, the second effect (in this example, the privilege granting effect shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and (3)) corresponding to the operation of the second operating means (start lever 135 in this example) is performed. Although it is possible to start, at the timing shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (1), the operation request display requesting the player to operate the start lever (second operating means) 135 is not performed.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (2) show the continuation of the continuous hitting effect. In this example, the AT addition notification is started triggered by the pressing operation of the effect button (first operating means) 132. ing.

In the AT addition notification of this example, each time the pressing operation of the effect button (first operating means) 132 is received, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to include a number suggesting a part of the number of addition games determined to be added. By displaying an image, a part of the number of AT additional games is notified.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (3) indicate the start of total notification (first effect) during the continuous hit effect, and in this example, the effect button (first operation means) is shown during the continuous hit effect. ) The total notification TG is started when the pressing operation of 132 is received a predetermined number of times (the total of the operation response displays of the predetermined number of times is predetermined to be 80 in this example).

In the total notification TG of this example, the number of additional games determined to be added by using the liquid crystal display device 157 when the pressing operation of the effect button (first operating means) 132 is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). By displaying an image including a number suggesting the total number of games, the total number of AT-added games (80G in this example) is notified.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (4) show an example of a result notification effect when a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game during the continuous hitting effect.

In the result notification effect KG of this example, the display of the number of remaining AT games on the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed from 153G to 232G when the pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is accepted in the next game. By updating to (= 153G + 80G-1G (operation by the start lever)), the result of the AT game (the number of remaining AT games) is notified to the player.

<Second production in continuous hitting production (privilege production)>
35 (b) (1) to 35 (b) (3) are diagrams showing an example in which a second effect (privilege grant effect) is started in the continuous striking effect in chronological order. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (1) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

The effects shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (2) show the continuation of the continuous hitting effect, and in this example, the next game is started when a specified number (3) of medals are inserted. .. In this example, since the operation of the effect button 132 was not accepted during the period when the operation request display corresponding to the effect button 132 is displayed, the total notification (first effect) is not started.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (3) indicate the start of the privilege granting effect (second effect) during the continuous hitting effect. In this example, the start lever (second operation) is shown during the continuous hitting effect. Means) With the reception of the pressing operation of 135 once, the privilege granting effect SG and the result notification effect KG described with reference to FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (a) and (4) are started.

In the privilege-giving effect SG of this example, when the pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is received once, the character suggesting the addition of AT by using the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, GREAT). ) Is displayed to notify the player that the privilege (additional AT) has been granted.

Needless to say, various notifications may be performed by a display other than GREAT (for example, GOOD, COL, EXCELLENT, etc.) according to the total number of games to be added.

In this example, the total notification is started as the first effect, and the privilege granting effect is started as the second effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the start lever (second). (Operation means) The result notification effect KG, which is started by the pressing operation of 135, may be used as the second effect.

Further, the first effect and the second effect may be the same effect, or one may have an effect and the other may have no effect. Further, in this example, the total notification and the privilege granting effect are the effects of notifying the player about the benefits that are advantageous to the player, but other types of effects may be used.

Further, the operation request display corresponding to the effect button 132 is not limited to the button image BG and the instruction image IG shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (1), and is displayed in, for example, any one of a plurality of patterns. In this case, an operation request display as shown in FIG. 35 (c) may be displayed as one of the plurality of patterns.

In the operation request display of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used, and the button image (operation request display) imitating the appearance of the effect button (first operation means) 132 is shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (1). By blinking the button image (deca button image) BG2 larger than the button image BG and displaying the instruction image (operation request display) IG2 containing the characters "press!" Above the button image BG2, the effect button 132 The operation request is displayed to request the player to operate the above a plurality of times (striking the effect button 132 repeatedly).

<Judge production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, various effects in a series of judges will be described.

Here, the judge effect is an effect of notifying the result of the completed game, and is an example of the "second certain effect" according to the present invention. The "results of the completed games" include, for example, the result of a lottery according to the internal winning combination, the result of the lottery according to the number and number of CZ games, the number of fits, etc., the winning result of various lottery, and the mini game. Results etc. can be mentioned.

In this judge effect (a second effect), a third effect (in this example, an operation response effect) corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) can be started. However, the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the start lever 135).

When the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the start lever 135) is accepted in the judge effect (a second effect), the first operation means is performed without starting the third effect. It may be configured so that the operation validity period of is terminated. Further, the second certain effect is not limited to the judge effect, and is, for example, an effect in which a part of the effect mode is different from the continuous hitting effect described with reference to FIG. 35 (some effect modes are common). May be good.

<Third production in judge production (operation response production)>
36 (a) (1) to 36 (a) (8) are diagrams showing an example in which a third effect (result notification effect) is started in the judge effect in chronological order.

The effects shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (1) indicate the start of the judge effect executed in the CZ (chance zone). , The judge production performed during CZ has started. In the judge effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a notification effect including the characters "development!" To notify that the gaming state has shifted to CZ.

Subsequent FIGS. 36 (a) (2) to (a) (4) are views showing an example of the production in the first to third games of CZ. In this example, in the first CZ game, a judge effect including a video of the lord chasing the old man is performed, in the next CZ2 game, a judge effect including a video of the lord approaching the old man is performed, and in the next CZ3 game, the lord is performed. Is performing a judge production including a video of catching up with the old man and colliding.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (5) show the continuation of the judge effect executed in the third CZ game. The result display (winning) of the lottery to be executed (AT lottery in this example) has started.

In the result display of the judge effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the lord catches the old man and an image including the characters "capture", so that the lord wins in the judge effect ( The player is notified that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been won).

The subsequent effect shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (6) shows the continuation of the judge effect executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, the result display described with reference to FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (5). In addition, the confirmation production has started.

In the confirmation effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to turn on (non-blink) the button image (operation request display) BG3 that imitates the appearance of the effect button (first operation means) 132. The effect button 132 is displayed by displaying an operation request requesting the player to press and operate the effect button 132, and displaying an explanatory image DG including the characters "result confirmation" on the right side of the button image BG3. It is suggested to the player that the lottery result in the CZ can be confirmed by pressing the button.

Further, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect of this example has a larger image than the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous striking effect described with reference to FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (1). In addition to being small, the display position, color, and display mode are different.

Specifically, the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, whereas the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous striking effect is displayed. , Is displayed in the lower center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Further, while the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect is lit in blue (non-blinking display), the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous striking effect is displayed in white blinking. ..

According to this example, since the button image (operation request display) BG during the continuous striking effect and the button image (operation request display) BG3 during the judge effect are at least partially different operation request displays, the continuous striking effect (first). In a certain effect), the second operating means functions as a so-called hidden button, and it can be suggested that the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means (second effect) is the hidden button effect. .. On the other hand, in the judge effect (a second effect), the operation of the second operating means is invalid, and it can be suggested that the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means is not executed.

It should be noted that the button image (operation request display) during the continuous striking effect and the button image (operation request display) during the judge effect may be displayed in which at least one of the size, color, and display position is different from each other. ..

Further, the button image (operation request display) during the repeated hitting effect may be a display displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns, but the button image (operation request display) during the judge effect is displayed. ) Is preferably a display displayed in one pattern.

Although not shown, the LED (light output) included in the effect button (first operating means) 132 (not shown) is provided during the period when the operation request display (button image BG3 and explanatory image DG in this example) is displayed. By executing the effect of lighting the effect), the effect button (first operating means) 132 is different from the first state (blinking state) of the effect button (first operating means) 132 during the continuous striking effect. It is shifting to the second state (lighting state).

According to this example, it can be implied that there is a period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective depending on the state of the operating means and the mode of displaying the operation request.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (7) indicate the start of the operation response effect (third effect) during the judge effect, and in this example, the effect button (first operation) is performed during the judge effect. Means) The operation response effect RG is started when the pressing operation of 132 is accepted once.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when the effect button (first operation means) 132 is pressed once, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to suggest a game that has won the AT lottery and an internal winning combination. The lottery result in the CZ is notified by displaying an image including the character (in this example, the watermelon of the internal winning combination wins in the 2G of the CZ).

In this embodiment, the winning probability is different depending on the internal winning combination, but one or more combinations such as the number of CZ games and the number of fits, the number of CZ rushes, the rush opportunity, and the acquisition status of chance-up items. The winning probability may be different depending on the game.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (8) show an example of an effect when the start lever 135 is pressed in the next game during the judge effect. In this example, the effect is shown during the judge effect. Even if the pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 is accepted, the effect corresponding to the pressing operation is not executed.

In FIGS. 36 (b) (7) to (b) (8), the button image (operation request display) BG3 is displayed during the judge effect, but the effect button (first operation means) 132 is not operated. It is a figure which showed the production example in the case of.

In this example, if the effect button (first operation means) 132 is not operated after the confirmation effect described with reference to FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (6) is started, the effect button (first operation) is not operated. Means) Result confirmation according to the operation of 132 The valid period of operation of the first operation means has elapsed until a predetermined opportunity arrives (for example, until the next game is started, or the operation valid period of the first operation means elapses) without starting the effect RG. Until then), it is configured to continue the confirmation effect.

<Modification example of repeated hitting effect>
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a modification of the continuous hitting continuous firing described with reference to FIG. 35 will be described.

In the continuous striking effect of this example (a certain effect of the first), after starting the first effect (total notification in this example) corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (effect button 132 in this example). , When the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the start lever 135) is received during the execution of the first effect, the second operation is performed without executing the remaining part of the first effect. The second effect (in this example, the result notification effect) corresponding to the operation of the operating means (start lever 135) can be started.

37 (1), FIG. (2), and FIG. (4) are drawings corresponding to FIGS. 35 (a) (1), (a) (2), and (a) (4). It is a figure which showed the example which starts the 2nd effect (result notification effect) while the 1st effect (total notification) is executed in the continuous hitting effect in chronological order.

Specifically, in the AT addition notification (first effect) shown in FIG. 37 (2), the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed each time the effect button (first operating means) 132 is pressed during the continuous striking effect. By displaying an image including a number suggesting a part of the number of additional games determined to be added, the number of AT additional games is notified.

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 37 (4) shows an example of a result notification effect (second effect) when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received during the execution of the AT addition notification.

In the result notification effect of this example, the AT addition notification is displayed in the middle (FIG. 37 (2)) triggered by the reception of the pressing operation of the start lever (second operating means) 135 during the execution of the AT addition notification. Before the total of the result display for each pressing operation reaches 80), the display of the number of remaining AT games on the liquid crystal display device 157 is changed from 153G to 232G (= 153G + 80G-1G (operation by the start lever)). By updating, the result of the AT game (the number of remaining AT games) is notified to the player.

<Invention 1 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the invention 1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. 132) and a game table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate, which is a certain effect (hereinafter, "the first certain"). For example, the continuous striking effect shown in FIG. 35 is referred to as an effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (hereinafter, referred to as a “first effect”. For example, it is shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (3). It is an effect that can start the total notification TG), and the first certain effect is an effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect", for example, FIG. 35 (b). ) The effect that can start the privilege granting effect SG shown in (3), and is different from the first certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "second certain effect", for example, in FIG. 36. The judge effect shown) can start an effect corresponding to the operation of the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as a “third effect”; for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (7)). The second certain effect is an effect in which the effect is not started in response to the operation of the second operating means, and the first certain effect corresponds to the first operating means. It is an effect including an effect of displaying an operation request display (hereinafter referred to as “first operation request display”; for example, the button image BG and the instruction image IG shown in FIGS. 35A and 35A). The operation request display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation request display”; for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (6)) is displayed. The game console is characterized in that, at least a part of the first operation request display and the second operation request display are different displays.

According to the game console according to the first aspect of the present invention, the first operation request display in the first certain effect and the second operation request display in the second certain effect are different operation request displays. In a certain effect, the second operating means functions as a so-called hidden button, and it can be suggested that the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means (second effect) is the hidden button effect. On the other hand, it can be suggested that the operation of the second operating means is invalid in a certain second effect, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operating means is not executed.

Further, the first operating means blinks a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state", for example, LED) in at least a part of the period during which the first operation request display is displayed. The first operating means is a means for causing the LED to blink, and the first operating means is in a certain state (hereinafter, "second state") during at least a part of the period in which the second operation request display is displayed. For example, the lighting state for lighting the LED), and the first state and the second state may be different states.

With such a configuration, it can be implied that there is a period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective depending on the state of the operating means and the mode of displaying the operation request.

Further, the first operation request display and the second operation request display are displays including a display imitating the appearance of the first operation means (for example, the appearance of the effect button 132), and the first operation request display and the second operation request display. The operation request display and the second operation request display may be different in size, color, and display position from each other.

With such a configuration, the first operation request display and the second operation request display are the operation request displays corresponding to the first operation means, and the first operation request display and the second operation request display. It can be clarified that the production differs depending on the operation of the first operating means.

Further, the first certain effect is a continuous hitting effect (for example, the continuous hitting effect shown in FIG. 35), and the first effect is a plurality of the first operating means in the first certain effect. It is an effect that is started by operating the second operation once, and the second effect may be an effect that is started by operating the second operating means once in a certain first effect. ..

With such a configuration, it can be suggested that the first operating means is effective in a certain first effect, and the role of the first operating means in a certain first effect is different from that of the second operating means. Can be made clearer.

In addition, the first certain effect is a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, an addition of an AT game, an addition of the number of medals acquired, an AT winning judge such as a bonus or a pseudo bonus from normal times, and various lottery. It is an effect of notifying the grant, transition to a state advantageous to the player (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.), and the second certain effect is the result of the finished game (for example, internal winning). It may be an effect of notifying the result of the lottery according to the combination, the result of the lottery according to the number and number of CZ games, the number of fits, the winning result of various lottery, the result of the mini game, etc.).

With such a configuration, the difference between a first effect in which the second operating means is valid and a second effect in which the second operating means is invalid can be made clearer. It is possible to improve the playability.

Further, the first certain effect may be an effect that does not include an effect of displaying an operation request display corresponding to the second operation means.

With such a configuration, in a certain first effect, the second operation means functions as a so-called hidden button, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the second operation means (second effect) is a hidden button effect. Can be suggested to be.

Further, the first operation request display is displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns (for example, the pattern shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (1) and the pattern shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and (1)). The second operation request display may be a display displayed in one pattern (for example, the pattern shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (6)).

With such a configuration, the difference between the first operation request display and the second operation request display can be clarified, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

Further, when the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated once or a plurality of times in the first certain effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the effect button 132). When the start lever 135 is operated after being repeatedly hit), a part of the first effect is executed, and the second effect is started without executing the remaining part. It is also good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cancel (interrupt) the first effect started by the operation by the first operation means and start the second effect, which enhances the convenience of the player. can.

<Judge victory production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, various effects in the judge victory effect will be described.

Here, the judge victory effect is an effect related to the granting or continuation of a privilege advantageous to the player, and is an example of "a certain effect" according to the present invention. As "privileges advantageous to the player", for example, an AT game is added, the number of medals won is added, an AT winning judge such as a bonus or a pseudo bonus is given from normal times, various lottery is given, and the player is given. Transition to an advantageous state (AT, bonus, high navigation state, etc.) can be mentioned. Further, a certain effect may be an effect that is not related to the granting or continuation of a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

In this judge victory effect (certain effect), when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) is displayed in connection with the judge victory effect (certain effect) (first case). ), And there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (effect button 132) is not displayed in connection with the judge victory effect (certain effect).

Further, in the first case, the operation is performed when the operation means (effect button 132) is operated while the privilege is given or the privilege is notified that the privilege is continued and the operation request display is displayed. The response effect is started.

<Operation request display and operation response production in the judge victory production>
FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (1) to (a) and (8) are diagrams showing an example in chronological order of starting the operation response effect after displaying the operation request display in the judge victory effect. It is a figure corresponding to 36 (a) (1) to the figure (a) (8).

The effects shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (1) indicate the start of the judge victory effect executed in the CZ (chance zone), and in this example, the game shifts to the CZ triggered by the third stop operation in the game. At the same time, the judge victory production that is executed during CZ has started.

In the judge victory effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a notification effect including the characters "development!" To notify that the user has moved to the CZ. The start trigger of the judge victory effect (certain effect) is not limited to the third stop operation, and may be, for example, the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112.

Subsequent FIGS. 38 (a) (2) to (a) (4) are views showing an example of the production in the first to third games of CZ. In this example, in the first CZ game, a judge victory effect including a video of the lord chasing the old man is performed, and in the next CZ2 game, a judge victory effect including a video of the lord approaching the old man is performed, and in the next CZ3 game. , Performing a judge victory production including a video of the lord catching up with the old man and colliding.

In this embodiment, the judge victory effect is continued for three games, but the player's appearance is whether or not he has won the judge up to the third game of CZ (that is, whether or not he has won the AT). It is configured so that it cannot be identified. Further, in this embodiment, the AT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination established at the time of operating the start lever of each game of CZ, and if the AT lottery is won once and the CZ remains, the AT lottery is performed. Although it is configured not to be, a lottery may be performed in each game of CZ regardless of the lottery result in order to have a possibility of winning two or more ATs. In this case, it is sufficient to notify that there have been a plurality of winnings in the "result confirmation" described later.

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (5) show the continuation of the judge victory effect executed in the third CZ game. In this example, the third stop operation in the third CZ game is used as an opportunity to perform the CZ. The result display (winning) of the lottery (AT lottery in this example) executed in 1 is started.

In the result display of the judge victory effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the lord catches the old man and an image including the characters "capture", so that the lord wins in the judge victory effect. This is notified to the player (that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been won).

The subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (6) show the continuation of the judge victory effect executed in the third CZ game, and in this example, the results described with reference to FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (5). In addition to the display, the confirmation effect has started.

In the confirmation effect of this example, the effect button 132 is displayed by lighting the button image (operation request display) BG3 that imitates the appearance of the effect button (operation means) 132 by using the liquid crystal display device 157. By displaying an operation request requesting the player to press and operating, and displaying an explanatory image DG including the characters "result confirmation" on the right side of the button image BG3, the effect button 132 can be pressed. For example, it suggests to the player that the lottery result in the CZ can be confirmed.

Subsequent effects shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (7) indicate the start of the operation response effect during the judge victory effect. In this example, the effect button (operation means) 132 is pressed during the judge victory effect. The operation response production RG is started with the reception once.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when the effect button (operation means) 132 is pressed once, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate the number of games won in the AT lottery and the characters suggesting the internal winning combination. By displaying an image including (in this example, the watermelon of the internal winning combination is won in the 2G of the CZ), the lottery result in the CZ is notified.

The trigger for starting the operation response effect is not limited to the pressing operation of the effect button (operation means) 132, and the next operation after the operation valid period of the effect button (operation means) 132 has elapsed (for example, the start lever 135). It may be a pressing operation of, a pressing operation of a bet button, etc.).

Subsequent productions shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (8) show an example of the production when the start lever 135 pressing operation is accepted in the next game during the judge victory production. In this example, the next game is shown. Even if the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the effect (confirmation of the lottery result in CZ) corresponding to the pressing operation is not executed.

Further, in this embodiment, a series of flow of winning the AT from the CZ is shown. For example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G at the end of the AT, and the configuration functions as a judge effect as to whether or not the AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of the lottery result" informs the factor that causes the AT to continue.

FIGS. 38 (b) (1) to (b) (2) are diagrams showing an example of a judge defeat effect (an effect when the AT lottery in CZ is not won).

In this example, instead of the lottery result display (winning) described using FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (5), the defeat effect corresponding to the lottery result display (non-winning) is started, and then FIG. 38 (a). ) It is configured to shift to another effect (in this example, return to the normal effect) without displaying the operation request display described using (6).

In the defeat production of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the lord misses the old man and an image including the characters "escape", so that the lord is defeated in the judge production (during CZ). The player is notified that the lottery to be executed (AT lottery) has been missed).

<Judge revival production>
Next, various effects in the judge revival effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

In this judge revival effect (certain effect), when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) is displayed in connection with the judge revival effect (certain effect) (first case). ), And there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (effect button 132) is not displayed in connection with the judge revival effect (certain effect).

Further, in the second case, it is notified that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or that the privilege will continue after once suggesting that the privilege will not continue. , The operation response effect may be started (third case) when the operation means (effect button 132) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed. In this third case, the operation response effect is produced. It is notified that the benefit will be granted or that the benefit will continue after the execution of.

FIGS. 39 (1) to 39 (9) are diagrams showing an example of the effect in chronological order when the operation request display is not displayed (in the second case) in the judge revival effect. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 39 (1) to 39 (4) are the same as the judge victory effects described with reference to FIG. 38, the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 39 (5) shows the continuation of the judge revival effect executed in the CZ3 game, and in this example, the lottery executed during the CZ triggered by the third stop operation of the CZ3 game. (In this example, the AT lottery) result display (non-winning) has started.

In the result display of the judge revival effect of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the lord misses the old man and an image including the characters "escape", so that the lord is defeated in the judge revival effect. This (that is, the fact that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been missed, that is, the confirmation of the lottery result during the CZ) is notified to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a series of flow from CZ to AT is shown, but for example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G at the end of AT, and it functions as a judge effect as to whether or not AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of the lottery result" informs the factor that the AT does not continue.

The following effect shown in FIG. 39 (6) shows an example of the revival effect. In the revival effect of this example, when the start lever 135 is pressed in the next game, the lord is appointed. By displaying the video to be chased again and the image including the characters "Escape or collapsing !!", the player is notified that the privilege (AT game in this example) is given or continued.

40 (1) to 40 (10) show a case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (second case) and the operation means is operated to start the operation response effect (third case). ) Is shown in chronological order. Since the effects other than the effects shown in FIG. 40 (6) are the same as the judge revival effects described with reference to FIG. 39, the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 40 (6) indicates the start of the operation response effect during the judge revival effect. In this example, the effect button (operation means) 132, which is a hidden button, is pressed during the judge revival effect. The operation response effect RG is started when it is accepted once.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when the effect button (operation means) 132 is pressed once, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate the number of games won in the AT lottery and the characters suggesting the internal winning combination. In this example, the lottery result in the CZ is notified by displaying the image including (winning with the watermelon of the internal winning combination in the 2G of the CZ, that is, confirmation of the lottery result in the CZ).

Further, in this embodiment, a series of flow of winning the AT from the CZ is shown. For example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G at the end of the AT, and the configuration functions as a judge effect as to whether or not the AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of the lottery result" informs the factor that causes the AT to continue.

According to this example, even if the operation request display corresponding to the effect button (operation means) 132 is not displayed, the operation response effect RG may be started in response to the operation of the effect button (operation means) 132. Therefore, by giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to a certain effect, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display.

It should be noted that this operation response effect RG also functions as an effect of notifying the factor of granting or continuing the privilege (an effect of notifying that the revival effect will be executed in the next game). Further, the operation response effect RG in the judge revival effect of this example and the operation response effect RG in the judge victory effect described with reference to FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (7) are the same effect.

<Judge defeat production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, various effects in the judge defeat effect will be described.

In this judge defeat effect (certain effect), when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (in this example, the effect button 132) is displayed in connection with the judge defeat effect (certain effect) (first case). ), And there is a case (second case) in which the operation request display corresponding to the operation means (effect button 132) is not displayed in connection with the judge defeat effect (certain effect).

Further, in the second case, it is notified that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or that the privilege will continue after once suggesting that the privilege will not continue. If the operation means (effect button 132) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed, the operation response effect may not be started (fourth case).

41 (1) to 41 (7) show the case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge defeat effect (second case), and the operation means is operated but the operation response effect is not started (fourth case). It is a figure which showed the production example of case) in chronological order. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 41 (1) to 41 (4) are the same as the judge victory effects described with reference to FIG. 38, the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 41 (5) shows the continuation of the judge defeat effect executed in the third game of CZ. In this example, the lottery executed during the CZ triggered by the third stop operation of the third game of CZ. (In this example, the AT lottery) result display (non-winning) has started.

In the result display of the judge defeat production in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display a still image in which the lord misses the old man and an image including the characters "escape", so that the lord is defeated in the judge defeat production. This is notified to the player (that the lottery (AT lottery) executed during the CZ has been missed).

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 41 (6) shows the continuation of the defeat effect of FIG. 41 (5). In this example, the operation of the operating means (effect button 132) was accepted during the execution of the defeat effect. , The operation response effect is not started, but is configured to shift to another effect (in this example, it returns to the normal effect).

<Modification example of judge revival production>
Next, a modified example of the judge revival effect will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

In the judge revival effect described with reference to FIG. 40, the defeat effect is started with the third stop operation as a trigger, and when the operation of the operation means (effect button 132) is accepted after the third stop operation, the operation response effect is performed. Although an example is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation response effect may be started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating.

FIG. 42 shows a case where the operation request display is not displayed in the judge revival effect (second case), and the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. It is a figure which showed the production example of. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 42 (1) to 42 (5) are the same as the judge revival effects described with reference to FIG. 40, the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect shown in FIG. 42 (6) shows an example of the revival effect, and in the revival effect of this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in the next game of the game in which the defeat effect is executed. As an opportunity, by displaying a video in which the lord chases the old man again and an image containing the characters "Escape or collapsing !!", the player is informed that the privilege (AT game in this example) will be granted or continued. is doing.

The subsequent effect shown in FIG. 42 (7) indicates the start of the operation response effect during the judge revival effect, and in this example, in the next game of the game in which the defeat effect is executed, among the reels 110 to 112. The operation response effect RG is started when the operation of pressing the effect button (operation means) 132, which is a hidden button, is accepted once while at least one of the above is rotating.

In the operation response effect RG of this example, when the effect button (operation means) 132 is pressed once, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to indicate the number of games won in the AT lottery and the characters suggesting the internal winning combination. In this example, the lottery result in the CZ is notified by displaying the image including (winning with the watermelon of the internal winning combination in the 2G of the CZ, that is, confirmation of the lottery result in the CZ).

Further, in this embodiment, a series of flow of winning the AT from the CZ is shown. For example, the CZ part is the remaining 3G at the end of the AT, and the configuration functions as a judge effect as to whether or not the AT continues this 3G. In this case, the "confirmation of the lottery result" informs the factor that causes the AT to continue.

Further, in the judge victory effect described with reference to FIG. 38, the period from the acceptance of the third stop operation in the game to the start of the next game is the operation acceptance valid period in which the operation of the operation means can be accepted. However, in this example, the period from the acceptance of the third stop operation in the game to the acceptance of the third stop operation in the next game is set as the operation acceptance valid period, and the judge victory effect (first case). ) And the judge revival production (in the second case), the operation reception validity period is different.

The operation acceptance valid period is not limited to this example, for example, the period from the acceptance of the third stop operation in the game to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), or the third stop in the game. It may be the period from the acceptance of the operation until the specified number of medals are bet, and the starting point of the operation acceptance valid period is the pressing operation of the start lever 135, the first stop operation, or the second stop. It may be after the operation is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 42 (8), the operation response effect RG is continued until the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button (operation means) 132 elapses (in this example, until the third stop operation is accepted). You may do it. Further, in this example, an example of starting the operation response effect RG when the operation of the effect button 132 is accepted is shown, but the operation is performed when the operation of another operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139) is accepted. The response effect RG may be started.

<Invention 2-1 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) is an operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. ), And the operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (6)) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain effect (for example, a judge effect) is provided. There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 38), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect (hereinafter, it is referred to as "first case"). Hereinafter, there is a "second case" (for example, the judge revival effect shown in FIG. 40), and the operating means is operated in either the first case or the second case. In this case, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (7) and the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 40 (6)) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is started. It is a game table characterized by.

Further, the gaming table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. A gaming table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first operating means in connection with a certain effect. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (6)) is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 38). When the operation request display corresponding to the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "second case", for example, the judge shown in FIG. 40). There is a revival effect, and in the first case, when at least the first operating means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (for example, FIG. 38A) ( The operation response effect RG) shown in 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect according to the operation of the second operation means) is started. , The operation response effect effect RG) shown in FIG. 40 (6) is started.

According to the game table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started according to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the production, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display.

<Invention 2-2 of the present application>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) according to the invention 2-2 of the present application is an operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. ), The gaming table is a slot machine, and an operation request display corresponding to the operating means in relation to a certain effect (for example, a judge effect) (for example, FIG. 38 (a)). There is a case where the button image BG shown in (6) is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge winning effect shown in FIG. 38), and the operation means is used in connection with the certain effect. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display is not displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"; for example, the judge revival effect shown in FIG. 40), and it is either the first case or the second case. However, when the operation means is operated, the operation response effect according to the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (7), the operation shown in FIG. 40 (6)). The game table is characterized in that the response effect RG) is started, and in the first case, the display of the operation request display is started with all the reels stopped.

Further, the gaming table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. A game table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. The game table is a slot machine, and is used for a certain effect. Relatedly, when the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (6)) is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”, for example. There is a judge victory effect shown in FIG. 38, and the operation request display corresponding to the first operation means and the second operation means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter, "second case"). For example, there is a judge revival effect shown in FIG. 40), and in the first case, at least when the first operating means is operated, an operation response corresponding to the operation of the first operating means is performed. When the effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (7)) is started and at least the second operation means is operated in the second case, the second operation means is operated. The operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 40 (6)) corresponding to the operation of the above is started, and in the first case, the operation request display is displayed with all the reels stopped. It is a game table characterized by the fact that is started.

According to the game console according to the invention 2-2 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started according to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the production, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is displayed, the operation request display is started after all the reels are stopped, so that the player can concentrate on the operation by the operation means.

<Invention 2-3 of the present application>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) according to the invention 2-3 of the present application is an operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. ), And the operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (6)) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain effect (for example, a judge effect) is provided. There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 38), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect (hereinafter, it is referred to as "first case"). Hereinafter, there is a "second case" (for example, the judge revival effect shown in FIG. 40), and the operating means is operated in either the first case or the second case. In this case, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (7) and the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 40 (6)) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is started. It is a game table characterized in that the first case is more likely to appear than the second case.

Further, the gaming table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. A gaming table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first operating means in connection with a certain effect. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (6)) is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 38). When the operation request display corresponding to the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "second case", for example, the judge shown in FIG. 40). There is a revival effect, and in the first case, when at least the first operating means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (for example, FIG. 38A) ( The operation response effect RG) shown in 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect according to the operation of the second operation means) is started. , The operation response effect effect RG) shown in FIG. 40 (6) is started, and the game table is characterized in that the first case is more likely to appear than the second case.

According to the game table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started according to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the production, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, since the frequency of appearance is higher when the operation request display is displayed than when the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player. It should be noted that the second case may be configured to appear more easily than the first case.

<Invention 2-4 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the invention 2-4 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) is an operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. ), And the operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (6)) corresponding to the operation means in relation to a certain effect (for example, a judge effect) is provided. There is a case where it is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 38), and the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed in relation to the certain effect (hereinafter, it is referred to as "first case"). Hereinafter, there is a "second case" (for example, the judge revival effect shown in FIG. 40), and the operating means is operated in either the first case or the second case. In this case, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect RG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (7) and the operation response effect RG shown in FIG. 40 (6)) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is started. The effect is a game table characterized in that it is an effect performed in connection with a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

Further, the gaming table according to the invention 2-4 of the present application (for example, the slot machine 100 and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22) is a first operating means (for example, an effect button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate the gaming table. A gaming table provided with a second operating means (for example, a start lever 135) provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first operating means in connection with a certain effect. There is a case where the corresponding operation request display (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (6)) is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”; for example, the judge victory effect shown in FIG. 38). When the operation request display corresponding to the first operating means and the second operating means is not displayed in connection with the certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "second case", for example, the judge shown in FIG. 40). There is a revival effect, and in the first case, when at least the first operating means is operated, an operation response effect corresponding to the operation of the first operating means (for example, FIG. 38A) ( The operation response effect RG) shown in 7) is started, and in the second case, when at least the second operation means is operated, the operation response effect (for example, the operation response effect according to the operation of the second operation means) is started. , The operation response effect RG) shown in FIG. 40 (6) is started, and the certain effect is an effect performed in connection with a privilege advantageous to the player.

According to the game table according to the invention 2-4 of the present application, even if the operation request display corresponding to the operation means is not displayed, the operation response effect may be started according to the operation of the operation means. By giving the player a sense of discomfort in relation to the production, it is possible to draw attention to the operation request display. Further, since a certain effect is an effect performed in relation to a privilege advantageous to the player, the expectation of the player can be improved.

In addition, the above-mentioned certain effects include benefits that are advantageous to the player (for example, addition of an AT game, addition of the number of medals acquired, granting an AT winning judge such as a bonus or a pseudo bonus from normal times, granting various lottery, and playing a game. It is an effect related to the granting or continuation of a state (AT, bonus, etc.) that is advantageous to the person, and in the first case, the privilege is granted or the privilege is continued. Is notified, and in the first case, when the operation means (or at least the first operation means) is operated while the operation request display is displayed, the operation response effect is started, and the operation response effect is started. In the second case, it is notified that the privilege will be granted after once suggesting that the privilege will not be granted, or that the privilege will continue after once suggesting that the privilege will not continue. In the second case, when the operation means (or at least the second operation means) is operated while the operation request display is not displayed, the operation response effect is started (hereinafter,). , "Third case"), and in the third case, it is notified that the privilege is given or the privilege continues after the operation response effect is executed. It may be a thing.

With such a configuration, when the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the operation request display is not displayed (in the third case), a privilege advantageous to the player is given or is given. It will function as a continuous notice and can enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the second case, when the operation means (or at least the second operation means) is operated while the operation request display is displayed, the operation response effect is not started (hereinafter,). There is a "fourth case"), and the third case may be easier to grant or continue the privilege than the fourth case.

With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player when the operation response effect is started when the operation means is operated while the operation request display is not displayed (in the third case). can.

Further, the operation response effect may be the same in the first case and the second case.

With such a configuration, the operation response effect can be the same regardless of the presence or absence of the operation request display, and the player's discomfort can be reduced.

Further, the operation response effect may be an effect of notifying the factor of granting or continuing the privilege.

With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player when the operation response effect is started, so that the operation by the operation means can be positively performed.

Further, the length of the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective may be different between the first case and the second case. Further, in the first case, the length of the period during which the operation of the first operating means is effective and the length of the period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective in the second case are different. You may.

With such a configuration, the difference between the first case and the second case can be clarified, and the playability can be enhanced.

Further, in the first case, the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective may be longer or shorter than in the second case. Further, the length of the period during which the operation of the second operating means is effective in the second case is longer than the period during which the operation of the first operating means is effective in the first case. It may be short or short.

Further, in the second case, the operation means (or the second operation means) is operated even when at least one of the plurality of reels is in a rotating state. The operation response effect may be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to accept an operation by the operating means and start an operation response effect even while the reel is rotating, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in either of the first case and the second case, the operation response effect may not be started if the operation means is not operated. Further, when the first operating means is not operated in the first case, or / and when the second operating means is not operated in the second case, the operation response effect is produced. It may not be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference from the case where the operating means is operated.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the above-described embodiment.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

In the embodiment of the slot machine described below, rotation is started when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. , The winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. However, if the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out the medium.

[overall structure]
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 43 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The outer plate constituting the main body 101 is composed of five wood-made plates (top surface, bottom surface, right side surface, left side surface, and back surface). Of the outer plates constituting the housing of the main body 101, the handle member 104 is attached to the side plates 103 constituting the left and right side surfaces. The outer plates constituting the main body 101 may be entirely made of metal, some of them may be made of metal, and the remaining plates may be made of wood. In this case, since it is necessary to form a hole 103h in the side plate 103 to which the handle member 104 is attached, it may be made of wood, which is easy to process, and the remaining plate may be made of metal.

Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110-112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, although the slot machine 100 is provided with three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 110-112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this optical sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines can be set arbitrarily.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the player is in a gaming state relating to the specific winning combination. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 tells the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game role, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp to inform you. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, one sheet is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. (Up to 3 sheets). Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out in a specific game state) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided below the inside of the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of a speaker provided above the inside of the slot machine 100 to the outside is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. It is provided. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ) Has a structure that appears. It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

[Handle member]
Hereinafter, the handle member 104 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44, 45, 46, and 47. 44 and 45 are perspective views showing the handle member 104, FIG. 46 is a side view showing the handle member 104, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the handle member 104.

As shown in FIG. 44, an opening OP is formed at one end of the handle member 104. Hereinafter, the handle member 104 will be described with the side facing the opening OP as the front, the longitudinal direction of the opening OP as the left-right direction, and the short direction as the vertical direction with reference to the mounted state. In the handle member 104, a bag-shaped internal space SP is formed from the opening OP. When the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, a hand is inserted into the internal space SP from this opening OP to grip the slot machine 100.

The opening OP of the handle member 104 is formed by the peripheral edge portion 1041. The peripheral edge portion 1041 is larger than the hole 103h of the side plate 103, which will be described later, and when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, the handle member 104 moves and drops inside the main body 101 (on the back side of the installation position). It has a role as a stopper to prevent it from happening. If the plate thickness of the peripheral edge portion 1041 protrudes to the outside of the side plate 103, the handle member 104 may be damaged during movement. Therefore, the hole 103h of the side plate 103 has a thickness equal to or greater than the plate thickness of the peripheral edge portion 1041. It is advisable to provide a counterbore portion (drop recess). When the side plate 103 is made of metal, the thickness of the side plate 103 is not as thick as that of woodwork, so it is preferable to provide a recess corresponding to the counterbore portion.

An introduction portion 1042 is formed from the peripheral portion 1041. The introduction portion 1042 is a portion that fits into the hole 103h when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, and has a size that matches the hole 103h of the side plate 103. Further, the introduction portion 1042 forms a portion of the internal space SP extending from the opening OP to the back surface side.

An intermediate portion 1043 is formed from the introduction portion 1042. The introduction portion 1043 is a portion connecting the introduction portion 1042 and the fingertip storage portion 1044 described later, and forms a curved portion connecting the portion extending to the back side and the portion extending upward in the internal space SP. .. More specifically, the upper surface of the introduction portion 1042 and the front surface side surface of the fingertip storage portion 1044 are connected in a curved portion, and the lower surface of the introduction portion 1042 and the back surface side of the fingertip storage portion 1044 are connected. By forming a portion in which a curved portion and a smoothed portion are connected, an L-shape as if the entire portion is curved is formed.

A fingertip storage portion 1044 is formed from the intermediate portion 1043. The fingertip storage portion 1044 forms a portion extending upward in the internal space SP and the innermost portion thereof (the uppermost portion in FIG. 44). The fingertip storage portion 1044 is configured so that the length in the left-right direction becomes shorter (narrower in the left-right direction) as it goes upward. With this configuration, the fingertips do not move easily when the slot machine 100 is transported, and the work can be performed stably.

With the introduction portion 1042, the intermediate portion 1043, and the fingertip storage portion 1044, the handle member 104 has an L-shape as a whole, and a step portion 1045 extending in the left-right direction is provided in the inner portion of the corner. ing. The step portion 1045 is one step higher than the upper surface of the introduction portion 1042 and one step higher than the front surface side of the fingertip storage portion 1044. The position of the front surface of the step portion 1045 is configured so that the side plate 103 can be sandwiched between the peripheral edge portion 1041 and the step portion 1045.

Further, on the lower side of the handle member 104, an elastic engaging portion 1046 for sandwiching the side plate 103 with the peripheral edge portion 1041 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 47, the handle member 104 is configured by combining two parts, the right side part 104A and the left side part 104B. Of these, the left side component 104B has a smaller joint portion so that the joint portion fits inside the right side component 104A, and the right side component 104A has a left side component at the joint portion with the left side component 104B. A step is formed for the 104B to fit inward. Further, these two parts are engaged by a so-called snap-fit type in a total of three engaging portions, that is, the first engaging portion 1047, the second engaging portion 1048, and the third engaging portion 1049 in the fingertip storage portion 1044. It is configured to fit.

The first engaging portion 1047 is composed of a wedge-shaped first locking portion 1047B of the left side component 104B and a first locked portion 1047A of the right side component 104A to which the first locking portion 1047B engages.

The second engaging portion 1048 is composed of a wedge-shaped second locking portion 1048B of the left side component 104B and a second locked portion 1048A of the right side component 104A to which the second locking portion 1048B engages.

The third engaging portion 1049 is composed of a wedge-shaped third locking portion 1049A of the right side component 104A and a third locked portion 1049B of the left side component 104B with which the third locking portion 1049A engages. The third locked portion 1049B is configured to cover the boundary between the joint portion on the back side of the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B, and also has a role of protecting the joint portion.

In the first engaging portion 1047 to the third engaging portion 1049, the respective locking portions (1047B, 1048B, 1049A) are flexed and elastically deformed as they are inserted into the locked portions (1047A, 1048A, 1049B). When the engagement position is reached and the elasticity is restored, the claw portion of the locking portion engages with the locked portion, so that the state in which the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B are coupled can be maintained. In this coupled state, the first locked portion 1047A is higher than the first locking portion 1047B in the front direction, and the second engaged portion 1048B is higher than the second locking portion 1048B in the upward direction. The stop portion 1048A is higher, and the third locked portion 1049B is higher than the third locking portion 1049A in the back direction.

Based on the configuration of the handle member 104 described above, the handle member 104 in a state of being attached to the side plate 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and 50. FIG. 48 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the side plate 103 without the handle member 104, and FIG. 48 (b) is a side view showing the positional relationship with the handle member 104 in the state of being attached to the side plate 103. .. Further, FIGS. 49 and 50 are views showing an example of the state of the handle member 104 during attachment (removal) to the side plate 103.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the side plate 103 is formed with a hole 103h penetrating in the thickness direction thereof. When the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, it is inserted into the hole 103h from the fingertip storage portion 1044 side of the handle member 104 as shown in FIG. Rotate to. At this time, the elastic engaging portion 1046 bends and elastically deforms with the insertion of the handle member 104, so that the elastic engaging portion 1046 can pass through the hole 103h. Finally, when the peripheral edge portion 1041 is pressed against the side plate 103, the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the peripheral edge portion 1041 and the stepped portion 1045 on the upper side of the introduction portion 1042. Further, on the lower side of the introduction portion 1042, the elastic engagement portion 1046 that has passed through the hole 103h is elastically restored, and the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the elastic engagement portion 1046 and the peripheral edge portion 1041. In this way, the handle member 104 is fitted so as to close the hole 103h, and the state shown in FIG. 48 (b) is obtained.

On the other hand, when the handle member 104 is removed, the elastic engaging portion 1046 is bent from the inside of the main body 101 to release the engaged state with the side plate 103 on the lower side of the handle member 104, and the elastic engaging portion 1046 is released. The handle member 104 is rotated around the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041 as a fulcrum while pushing the hole 103h into the hole 103h, and the fitted state of the side plate 103 on the upper side of the handle member 104 is released to the state shown in FIG. Then, the handle member 104 can be removed by moving the handle member 104 out of the main body 101 while rotating the handle member 104 so as to have the posture shown in FIG. 49.

The handle member 104 has a role of preventing injury or the like during transportation and installation of the slot machine 100. The hole 103h itself can be used as a handle. However, when the hole 103h is used as a handle, the side plate 103 may bite into the finger due to the load and may be injured. Further, when a plywood made by compressing wood chips is used for the side plate 103, there is a risk that a piece of wood may stick when a finger is put on the peripheral edge of the fragile hole 103h, and when a sheet metal is used for the side plate 103. May injure a finger at the periphery of the hole 103h. Since the handle member 104 can disperse the load applied to the finger and prevent the handle member 104 from directly touching the side plate 103, the above problem can be solved. Further, it also makes it difficult for foreign matter to enter the inside of the slot machine 100 from the outside. The handle member 104 may be separately fixed to the hole 103h by using a fixing member such as a screw, or may be attached and used during transportation and removed after installation. Further, even if the handle member 104 is removed, the size of the hole 103h is as small as possible (for example, width 80 to 90 mm, height 30 to 40 mm) so that fraudulent activity using the hole 103h becomes difficult. Degree) is preferable.

[Characteristics of handle member 104 (1)]
The handle member 104 has a curved shape, and when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, a part of the handle member 104 (fingertip storage portion 1044) is attached to the side plate 103 as shown in FIG. 48 (b). It will be in a state of facing. At this time, the first engaging portion 1047 of the handle member 104 is located in the space between the side plate 103 and the handle member 104. The engaging portion provided at such a position may collide with the side plate 103 due to the force applied to the handle member 104, and the engagement may be released due to the impact or breakage thereof. There is also the risk that such a collision will be intentionally made in order to disengage for fraudulent purposes.

In the handle member 104 described above, the stepped portion 1045 is located closer to the side plate 103 than the first engaging portion 1047 in a state of being attached to the side plate 103. In this configuration, when a force toward the side plate 103 is applied to the handle member 104, the movement of the handle member 104 is restricted by the step portion 1045 before the first engaging portion 1047 collides with the side plate 103, and the first engaging portion 1045 is used. It is possible to prevent the portion 1047 from colliding with the side plate 103. As described above, in the space between the side plate 103 and the handle member 104, if the handle member 104 has a restricting portion that restricts movement at a position closer to the side plate 103 than the first engaging portion 1047, the side plate. It is possible to prevent the collision between the 103 and the first engaging portion 1047.

The position where such a restricting portion is provided is not limited to the position provided on the curved portion as in the step portion 1045 described above, and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the first engagement. It may be directly below the portion 1047, directly above the first engaging portion 1047, or both directly below and above the portion 1047. Further, it may be provided on the left and right sides of the first engaging portion 1047. However, if the step portion 1045 is provided on only one of the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B, the engagement may be disengaged due to the collision between the step portion 1045 and the side plate 103. Therefore, the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B It is advisable to provide a stepped portion 1045 on both of the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), it may be provided on the upper surface of the introduction portion 1042. Further, the step portion 1045 of the handle member 104 extends in the left-right direction, but may be, for example, diagonally arranged on a surface composed of the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and extends in the up-down direction. It may be something to do. The handle member 104 and the step portion 1045 may be separated from each other, and the step portion 1045 may be provided according to the plate thickness of the side plate 103. In any case, the position of the first engaging portion 1047 is not limited as long as it restricts the movement of the first engaging portion 1047 toward the side plate 103.

If the regulating portion is not provided on the curved portion, the force is concentrated on the curved portion and the handle member 104 bends, so that the first engaging portion 1047 collides with the side plate 103 or the engaging portion is formed. There is a risk that the engagement may be easily disengaged, but a restricting portion may be provided on the curved portion such as the step portion 1045 of the handle member 104, or a portion closer to the curved portion than the first engaging portion 1047. By providing a restricting portion, it is possible to make the curved portion less likely to bend and to prevent such a problem from occurring.

In the handle member 104 described above, the step portion 1045 plays a role as a regulating portion for preventing a collision between the first engaging portion 1047 and the side plate 103. The step portion 1045 extends in the left-right direction, but the length of the regulation portion in the left-right direction is not limited to this length, and may be shorter. However, as the regulating portion becomes shorter, the handle member 104 bends and the first engaging portion 1047 and the side plate 103 tend to collide with each other, making it difficult to fulfill the role of the regulating portion. In this regard, since the force applied to the fingertips during transportation of the slot machine 100 is concentrated on the tip portion of the fingertip storage portion 1044, the length of the regulation portion is the tip portion (more specifically, the inside) of the fingertip storage portion 1044. By setting the length to be longer than the length in the left-right direction at the innermost part of the space SP), the role as a regulating unit can be exerted. The regulation portion is not limited to the integrated portion such as the step portion 1045, and may be provided separately at a plurality of locations. In this case, the total length in the left-right direction is the fingertip storage portion 1044. It suffices if the length is equal to or longer than the length in the left-right direction at the tip portion of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), a space for fitting the restricting portion including the step portion 1045 may be formed in the side plate 103, and a space (counterbore) for fitting the peripheral edge portion 1041. May be formed on the side plate 103.

[Characteristics of handle member 104 (2)]
As shown in FIG. 48 (b), when the handle member 104 is attached to the side plate 103, the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 on the upper surface of the introduction portion 142. It has become. When removing the handle member 104, the handle member 104 is rotated around the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041 as a fulcrum while pushing the elastic engaging portion 1046 into the hole 103h to release the pinched state of the side plate 103 on the upper surface of the introduction portion 142. After the state shown in FIG. 50, the handle member 104 is further moved out of the main body 101 while being rotated so as to be in the posture shown in FIG. 49. Here, if the height of the surface of the step portion 1045 is higher than the height of the surface of the peripheral portion 1041 with respect to the height of the facing surface of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral portion 1041 in the upward direction, the peripheral portion 1041 Even if the handle member 104 is rotated around the upper end portion as a fulcrum, the state in which the side plate 103 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 is not easily released, and the removal work takes time.

Regarding this point, in the handle member 104, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), the height H1 of the surface of the step portion 1045 is the peripheral edge with respect to the upward height of the facing surfaces of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041. The height of the surface of the portion 1041 is lower than the height H2. In this configuration, the amount of rotation and the load required to release the state in which the side plate 103 is sandwiched by the facing surfaces of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 can be reduced, and the work of removing the handle member 104 is easy. can do. Regarding such a configuration, the height of the surface of the step portion 1045 may be equal to or less than the height of the surface of the peripheral portion 1041 with respect to the upward height of the facing surfaces of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041. ..

Further, regarding the step portion 1045, for example, even if the side plate 103 is thicker than expected and the side plate 103 cannot be sandwiched by the facing surfaces of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041, the fingertip storage portion 1044 and the fingertip storage portion 1044. The side plate 103 can be sandwiched between the peripheral edge portion 1041 facing the same, and the handle member 104 can be attached with the side plate 103 mounted on the stepped portion 1045. That is, the width can be provided in the range of the thickness of the side plate 103 that can be attached.

Regarding the height of the facing surface of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 in the upward direction, when adopting a configuration in which the height of the surface of the step portion 1045 is equal to or less than the height of the surface of the peripheral edge portion 1041, the above is used. It is not limited to the one composed of a plurality of parts such as the handle member 104 described above, but can also be adopted in an integrally molded handle member. However, since the handle member composed of a plurality of parts such as the handle member 104 described above may be released from the engaged state due to a load applied at the time of removal, the handle member such as the handle member may be released from the engaged state. Regarding the height of the facing surface of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041 in the upward direction, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the height of the surface of the step portion 1045 is equal to or less than the height of the surface of the peripheral edge portion 1041.

Further, although the handle member 104 described above has an L-shaped shape when viewed from the side, the height of the surface of the step portion 1045 with respect to the upward height of the facing surfaces of the step portion 1045 and the peripheral edge portion 1041. The handle member 104 is rotated with the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041 as a fulcrum, even if the shape is different from this shape, except that the height of the peripheral portion 1041 is lower than the height of the surface of the peripheral edge portion 1041. It can be easily removed.

Further, when the upper end of the peripheral edge portion 1041 has a wavy design, the fulcrum of the rotational operation when removing the handle member 104 is the highest portion of the upper end portion of the peripheral edge portion 1041, and therefore this peripheral edge. The surface facing the portion 1041 may be configured to be at least the height thereof.

[Characteristics of handle member 104 (3)]
The handle member 104 described above is a combination of the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B, and a joint portion of these components is present. Such a joint portion is fragile as compared with other portions, and it is conceivable to destroy the joint portion on the back surface side of the handle member 104 in order to perform some kind of fraud particularly on the inside of the slot machine 100. However, as shown in FIG. 45, in the handle member 104, the joint portion between the right side component 104A and the left side component 104B is covered by the third locked portion 1049B of the third engaging portion 1049, and foreign matter is allowed to enter through the opening OP. Even if the foreign matter is to enter the main body 101 from the joint portion, the third locked portion 1049B, which is difficult to see from the outside of the slot machine 100, is located outside the joint portion, which makes it difficult for the foreign matter to enter. .. Specifically, a foreign object is allowed to enter the vicinity of the third engaging portion 1049 with the aim of disengaging the third engaging portion 1049, and even if the third engaging portion 1049 can be disengaged, the third engaging portion 1049 can be disengaged. Since the third locked portion 1049B is provided in the vicinity of the portion 1049, it is necessary to try to invade from a place different from the vicinity of the third engaging portion 1049. In this way, the boundary on the back side is protected, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at the joint portion.

Further, since the handle member 104 may be removed and reused, it is desired that the handle member 104 is less likely to be damaged due to attachment / detachment. When attaching / detaching the handle member 104, as shown in FIG. 49, the back surface side (particularly the curved portion) of the handle member 104 tends to come into contact with the side plate 103, and this contact may damage the joint portion. Since the joint portion on the back surface side is protected by the locked portion 1049B, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring.

The handle member 104 described above has a configuration in which the third engaging portion 1049 also has a role of protecting the joint portion on the back surface side, but a protective portion that protects the joint portion is provided separately from the engaging portion. It may be provided. However, like the handle member 104 described above, by integrating the engaging portion and the protective portion, a stronger configuration can be obtained, and the effects of fraud prevention and damage prevention can be enhanced.

The third locked portion 1049B is higher than the third locked portion 1049A in the back direction, and the claw portion of the third locked portion 1049A is higher than the third locked portion 1049B. Since it is configured so as not to protrude, even if the back surface side of the handle member 104 comes into contact with the side plate 103, the third locking portion 1049A does not come into contact with the side plate 103, making it difficult for the engaged state to be released. Can be done.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, as an example of a gaming table using the handle member 104, a slot machine 100 using a medal (coin) as a gaming medium is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming ball (for example, a gaming ball) is shown. , Pachinko balls) as a game medium, and can be applied to pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock game machines, smart balls, and the like.

Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , Such modifications and alterations are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

<< Composition of technical ideas included in the embodiment >>
Hereinafter, the technical ideas described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, an opening OP) and a bag-shaped internal space (for example, an internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle having a curved outer shape (for example, a handle member 104) is an outer plate. A game table (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to (for example, a side plate 103).
The handle is composed of a combination of a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B).
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts.
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) to which the plurality of parts are engaged.
The handle is provided with an outer plate side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047), which is an engaging portion, on a surface of the game table facing the outer plate.
The handle is provided with a regulating portion (for example, a step portion 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 48 (b)).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The handle is provided with a curved portion (for example, an intermediate portion 1043) inside the game table.
The restricting portion is provided at a position closer to the curved portion than the outer plate side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 46).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, an opening OP) and a bag-shaped internal space (for example, an internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle having a curved outer shape (for example, a handle member 104) is an outer plate. A game table (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to (for example, a side plate 103).
The handle is composed of a combination of a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B).
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts.
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) to which the plurality of parts are engaged.
The handle is provided with an outer plate side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047), which is an engaging portion, on a surface of the game table facing the outer plate.
The handle is provided with a regulating portion (for example, a step portion 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 48 (b)).
The restricting portion is provided along the longitudinal direction of the opening (see, for example, FIG. 44).
The length of the interior space along the longitudinal direction of the opening becomes shorter as it goes deeper into the interior space (see, for example, FIGS. 44 and 47).
The length of the restricting portion is longer than or equal to the innermost length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening (see, for example, the description of [feature (1) of the handle member 104]).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

also,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, an opening OP) and a bag-shaped internal space (for example, an internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle having a curved outer shape (for example, a handle member 104) is an outer plate. A game table (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to (for example, a side plate 103).
The handle is composed of a combination of a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B).
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts.
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) to which the plurality of parts are engaged.
The handle is provided with an outer plate side engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047), which is an engaging portion, on a surface of the game table facing the outer plate.
The handle is provided with a plurality of regulating portions (for example, a step portion 1045) at a position closer to the outer plate than the outer plate side engaging portion (for example, FIG. 48 (b), [handle]. Features of member 104 (1)]),
The plurality of restrictors are provided along the longitudinal direction of the opening (see, for example, FIG. 44).
The length of the interior space along the longitudinal direction of the opening becomes shorter as it goes deeper into the interior space (see, for example, FIGS. 44 and 47).
The total length of the plurality of restricting portions is a length equal to or greater than the innermost length of the internal space along the longitudinal direction of the opening (for example, [Characteristic (1) of the handle member 104]. reference),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The handle is provided with a curved portion (for example, an intermediate portion 1043) inside the game table.
The restricting portion is provided at a position closer to the curved portion than the outer plate side engaging portion (see, for example, FIG. 46).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, an opening OP) and a bag-shaped internal space (for example, an internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle having a curved outer shape (for example, a handle member 104) is an outer plate. A game table (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to (for example, a side plate 103).
The handle is provided with a peripheral edge portion (for example, peripheral edge portion 1041) forming the opening.
It is possible to sandwich the outer plate having a thickness equal to or less than a predetermined thickness between the upper edge portion of the peripheral edge portion and the stepped portion (for example, the stepped portion 1045) provided inside the game table (for example). , See FIG. 48 (b)),
The height of the surface of the step portion facing the outer plate is equal to or lower than the height of the surface of the upper edge portion facing the outer plate (see, for example, FIG. 48 (c)).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The step portion is provided between a surface facing the outer plate and higher than the height to the upper end of the step portion (for example, the fingertip storage portion 1044) and the upper edge portion (for example, the step portion). For example, see FIG. 48 (b)),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The handle is composed of a combination of a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B).
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts.
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) to which the plurality of parts are engaged.
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An opening into which a fingertip can be inserted (for example, an opening OP) and a bag-shaped internal space (for example, an internal space SP) continuing from the opening are formed, and a handle having a curved outer shape (for example, a handle member 104) is an outer plate. A game table (for example, a slot machine 100) attached to (for example, a side plate 103).
The handle is composed of a combination of a plurality of parts (for example, right side part 104A and left side part 104B).
The internal space is formed by a combination of the plurality of parts.
The handle is provided with an engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 1047, a second engaging portion 1048, and a third engaging portion 1049) to which the plurality of parts are engaged.
The handle is provided with a protective portion (for example, a third locked portion 1049B) that covers the joints of the plurality of parts inside the game table.
The protective portion is provided on the surface of the handle facing the inside of the game table (see, for example, FIG. 45).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The handle is provided with an engaging portion on the inside of the gaming table (for example, a third engaging portion 1049), which is the engaging portion, on the surface of the handle facing the inside of the game table. ,
The engagement portion on the inner side of the game table and the protection portion are integrated (see, for example, FIG. 45).
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The handle is provided with an engaging portion on the inside of the gaming table (for example, a third engaging portion 1049), which is the engaging portion, on the surface of the handle facing the inside of the game table. ,
The engagement portion on the inner side of the game table includes a locking portion having a claw portion (for example, a third locking portion 1049A) and a locked portion to which the claw portion is locked (for example, a third locked portion 1049B). )
The claw portion locked to the locked portion is configured so as not to protrude toward the inside of the game table from the locked portion (for example, [Characteristics (3) of the handle member 104). ], Refer to the description),
A game table, which is characterized by that, is described.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a spinning machine such as a slot machine 100 or a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 52 to 66. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 52 to 66 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 52 to 66, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 52 to 52 to 66 are used. In the description using FIG. 66, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 52 to 66 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>
FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing a slot machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied. In the slot machine 100, a game is started by inserting a medal, and the medal is paid out according to the result of the game.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 52 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101 via a hinge portion (not shown) provided on the left side of the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that only a clerk at a game store can open the front door 102. FIG. 52 (a-1) is a plan view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is closed, and the lower side of the figure is the front side (player side). FIG. 52 (a-2) shown below is a front view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is closed, with the front side of the paper facing the front side and arrows indicating the left-right direction and the up-down direction. It's a street.

When the main body 101 is divided into three parts, an upper part, a middle part, and a lower part, a first image display device 157 is arranged on the upper part. The first image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, but it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, or an organic display. It may be an EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen 1571 is configured to be visible to the player. On the display screen 1571 shown in FIG. 52 (a-2), a background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left is displayed. The display screen 1571 shown in FIG. 52 is a horizontally long rectangle having a horizontal length longer than the vertical length, but may be a square. Further, although the display screen 1571 is a flat surface, it may have a curved surface.

Side lamps 144 capable of emitting nine colors of light are arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen 1571. The side lamp 144 is a decorative lamp for enlivening the game.

The middle and lower parts of the main body 101 are covered by the front door 102. Sound holes 181 are arranged on the left and right sides of the lower portion of the front door 102. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 180 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Further, a medal payout outlet 155 for paying out medals is arranged in the lower center of the front door 102.

In the upper center of the front door 102, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols (not shown in FIG. 52) are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. In 52 (a-2), L is marked on the left reel 110, C is marked on the middle reel 111, and R is marked on the right reel 112. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

An appropriate number of symbols on the reels are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110-112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. The number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to those described here.

On the back surface of each reel 110-112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

A second image display device 158 is arranged on the left side of the three reels 110 to 112. The second image display device 158 is also a liquid crystal display device, but it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, or an organic display. It may be an EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 also has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen 1581 is configured to be visible to the player. The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 52 (a-2) also displays a background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 52 is a vertically long rectangle having a length in the vertical direction longer than the length in the horizontal direction, but may be a square. Further, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is smaller than the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157.

On the right side of the three reels 110 to 112, a stored number display 125 and a payout number display 127 are arranged. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize.

An operation panel 120 is arranged below the three reels 110 to 112. The operation panel 120 is provided with a start lever, a medal slot, three stop buttons, a bet button, a settlement button, a chance button, a volume adjustment button, and the like. The start lever is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. The medal slot is a slot for the player to insert a medal at the start of the game. The bet button is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet button, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot, and the insertion means that both are included. The three stop buttons are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. When the checkout button is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The chance button is a button provided to execute a predetermined effect. The volume adjustment button is a button for adjusting the volume of the speaker 180.

The front door 102 is provided with a key hole 140, and a key is inserted into the key hole 140, and the inserted key is unlocked by turning it to the right and locked by turning it to the left. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) for detecting that the front door 102 has been opened.

FIG. 52 (b-1) is a plan view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened up to 90 degrees through a hinge portion (not shown) provided on the left side, and the lower part of the figure is a plan view. Become the front side (player side). FIG. 52 (b-2) shown below is a side view of the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened up to 90 degrees, and the right side of the figure is the front side.

The second image display device 158 arranged on the front door 102 is rotated together with the front door 102. As a result, in the slot machine 100 in which the front door 102 is opened up to 90 degrees, the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 arranged in the main body 101 cannot be visually recognized from the left side, but the front door 102. The display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 arranged in the above can be visually recognized. On the other hand, from the front side, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 arranged on the front door 102 cannot be visually recognized, but the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 arranged on the main body 101 can be visually recognized. can do.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 52, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display 127, the side lamp 144, and the speaker 180 correspond to an example of the notification means.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a state of various notification means when a door opening error is detected.

In FIG. 53, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display device 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as examples of the notification means.

FIG. 53 (a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state immediately after the front door 102 is opened.

The background display for the effect represented by the hatching diagonally downward to the left, which was displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 52, disappears, and each display screen is displayed. In 1571 and 1581, a background display for error notification expressed in a single color (here, a single white color) is displayed. Further, on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" is displayed. The first error display ES10 is a blinking display that repeats disappearing momentarily and being displayed. In FIG. 53A, diagonal lines are displayed at the four corners of the first error display ES10, which indicates that the first error display ES10 is repeatedly displayed by disappearing momentarily. (Same for other figures). The first error display ES10 is a kind of error notification indicating that an error is detected in the slot machine 100, but is a kind of error notification in which it is not possible to specify what kind of error the detected error is. Further, the error list display EL1 is also displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157. The error list display EL1 is always displayed.

Here, the contents of various errors listed in the error list display EL1 and error cancellation will be described.

The door opening error with the error code E1 is notified when the front door 102 is in the open state. When the front door 102 is returned to the closed state, the error is cleared.

An empty hopper error with an error code of E2 is notified when the payout medals stored inside the slot machine 100 are exhausted and payout cannot be performed. That is, a motor-driven medal ejection device is provided inside the slot machine 100, and during the medal payout operation, the game medals of the medal ejection device disappear, and a payout switch for counting the medals to be paid out is a predetermined number. It does not turn on even after the lapse of 1 time, and is notified when the recovery cannot be performed even if the recovery process of rotating the motor in the reverse direction is performed. Open the front door 102 to replenish the medal ejection device with medals and press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. The error is canceled with.

For the hopper clogging error with the error code E3, the medal does not pass through the payout switch within the predetermined second time due to the medal of the medal ejection device being jammed during the medal payout operation, and the recovery process is performed. Even if it cannot be recovered, it will be notified. The error is cleared by opening the front door 102, removing the medal stuck in the medal ejection device, pressing the above reset button, closing the front door 102, and turning the key inserted in the key hole 140 counterclockwise. ..

The medal auxiliary box full error with the error code E4 is notified to the next game disclosure when the medal auxiliary box installed inside the slot machine 100 is full. That is, a sensor for detecting that the medal auxiliary box is full is provided, and the sensor is notified when the sensor detects that the medal auxiliary box is full. The error is cleared by opening the front door 102, removing the medal from the medal auxiliary box, and pressing the reset button, or closing the front door 102 and turning the key inserted in the key hole 140 counterclockwise.

An error in the number of passed medals with an error code of E5 is notified when the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are jammed. That is, inside the slot machine 100, a first insertion switch and a second insertion switch for counting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are provided, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the second insertion switch is provided. Notified when the on switch has been on for a predetermined third time or longer. Alternatively, the number of medals that have passed through the first insertion switch and the second insertion switch and the number of medals that have passed through the second insertion switch are also notified when they are out of the allowable range. Open the front door 102, remove the medal that is stuck in the medal passage path that continues from the medal insertion slot, and press the above reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error.

The medal passing time error with the error code E6 means that the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are clogged, and as a result, the medals pass through the first insertion switch or the second insertion switch within a predetermined fourth time. If not, you will be notified. Open the front door 102, remove the medal that is stuck in the medal passage path that continues from the medal insertion slot, and press the above reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn off the power-on switch and then turn it on, then press the above reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. good.

The medal passage confirmation error with the error code E7 is that when the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot is clogged and the first insertion switch is on for a predetermined fifth time or longer, the next medal is accepted. Sometimes notified. Alternatively, it is also notified when the first on switch or the second on switch is turned on at a time other than the predetermined sixth time set when the first on switch is turned on. Open the front door 102, remove the medal that is stuck in the medal passage path that continues from the medal insertion slot, and press the above reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. This will clear the error. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn off the power-on switch and then turn it on, then press the above reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. good.

The medal backflow error with the error code E8 is a result of the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot flowing in the opposite direction in the medal passage path, and as a result, the first insertion switch and the second insertion switch are not specified in the passing order. It is notified when it is detected that it has passed. Open the front door 102, remove the medal stuck in the medal passage path, press the above reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 counterclockwise to clear the error. Will be done. If the error still cannot be cleared, turn off the power-on switch and then turn it on, then press the above reset button, or close the front door 102 and turn the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. good.

The slot machine 100 is provided with an external centralized terminal plate that outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device (hall computer). When the eight types of errors described above are detected, they are output to an external device from the external centralized terminal board, and the game store can notice that the error has occurred. The signal output from the external centralized terminal board to the external device contains information (for example, an error code) that can identify the detected error.

In addition, if the error code is E2 to E8, the error cannot be cleared unless the front door 102 is opened. 2 The display screen 1581 of the image display device 158 can be visually recognized, and the display screen 1581 can be captured by the surveillance camera installed on the left side, indicating that the error clearing operation is performed. Further, even if the front door 102 is illegally opened, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 can be visually recognized even by a clerk who is far on the left side, and the display screen can be seen by the surveillance camera installed on the left side. It may be possible to capture 1581 and notice that the front door 102 has been illegally opened.

The player cannot tell which of the eight errors displayed in the error list display EL1 has occurred just by looking at the first error display ES "error occurrence". For example, it is not possible to specify whether it is a door open error or a hopper empty error. Here, for a person who illegally opens the front door 102 in order to commit an illegal act, he / she is worried that he / she may have done something else because the door opening error is not notified. , May be able to discourage cheating.

On the other hand, when an error (an error other than the door opening error) that occurs unintentionally by the player occurs, the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100 is pressed or the reset button is pressed to clear the error. Since I need a key, I have to call a clerk at a game store. Therefore, even if the error that has occurred cannot be identified, there is a possibility that the clerk will be called if only the fact that the error has occurred is known. You can also expect a clerk to be called to ask what the error occurred. Furthermore, the first error display ES is displayed even when the clerk opens the front door 102 using the key, but the clerk knows that the error that occurred is the door opening error, so that it occurred. There is no need to bother to notify that the error is a door open error. From these facts, the minimum necessary information notification such as the first error display ES10 is sufficient.

Further, the error list display EL1 displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 53A only displays the error code and the error name, and the error code and the error name (here). Then, it is not a display that specifies E1 or a door opening error).

The character display "Error occurred" is also displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. This character display has the same content as the first error display ES10, but is a similar figure whose size is smaller than that of the first error display ES10. Hereinafter, the character display of "error occurrence" displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is referred to as the first error display ES10'with the same content. The first error display ES10'displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 53A is also a display that blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the first error display ES10, and is a slot. It is a kind of error notification indicating that an error has been detected in the machine 100, but it is a kind of error notification in which it is not possible to specify what kind of error the detected error is.

Further, on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, a list display having the same contents as the error list display EL1 is also displayed. This list display is a similar figure whose size is smaller than that of the error list display EL1. Hereinafter, the list display displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is referred to as the error list display EL1'with the same contents. Like the error list display EL1, the error list display EL1'displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 53A is always displayed, and the error code and the error name are displayed. It is not a display that specifies a specific error code or error name.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 53 (a), the first error sound such as "error occurrence" is output, but the voice "door opening error" is not output. The first error sound is also a kind of error notification indicating that an error is detected in the slot machine 100, but is also a kind of error notification in which it is not possible to specify what kind of error the detected error is.

As described above, a door opening error occurs in the error list display EL1 displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, and the speaker 180. No error notification has been made to identify what has been done. On the other hand, the first error display ES10'displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 and the first error sound from the speaker 180 notify that some error has occurred.

Further, the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 53A is in a non-display state. When there is a payout during the game, a number indicating the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the payout number display 127, but when the front door 102 is opened, the payout number display 127 has been used so far. The displayed number disappears and the screen switches to the blank state. Even in the payout number display 127, an error occurs in the slot machine 100 while the first error display ES10, the first error display ES10'with the same contents, and the first error sound are output. Er may be displayed as a kind of error notification indicating that it has been detected.

In FIG. 53 (b) shown on the right side of FIG. 53, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first error display ES10 has the same contents from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. The state after'disappears is shown.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first error display ES10'with the same contents disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 in which the first error display ES10 has disappeared. When the first error display ES10 disappears, the error list display EL1 displays a display for specifying the error that has occurred. Here, as an error display for specifying the door opening error, the character display of E1 and the door opening error is surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display for specifying the door opening error is referred to as a second error display. Further, in the error list display EL1, the square thick frame display surrounding the character display of E1 and the door opening error is referred to as the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display. The display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display corresponds to a kind of error notification that can identify that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is a door opening error.

Further, the same content error list display EL1'is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 from which the first same content error display ES10'has disappeared. When the first error display ES10'with the same content disappears, the error display EL1'with the same content also displays to identify the error that has occurred. Again, as an error display for specifying the door opening error, the character display of E1 and the door opening error is surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display for specifying the door opening error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is referred to as the second error display having the same content. Further, in the same content error list display EL1', the square thick frame display surrounding the character display of E1 and the door opening error is referred to as the display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second content error display. The display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second error display having the same content also corresponds to a kind of error notification that can identify that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is a door opening error.

Whether the display ES21 is based on the first display mode of the second error display or the display ES21'is displayed according to the first display mode of the second error display of the same content, the character display of E1 and the door opening error is blinking. You may. Alternatively, the eight error codes are displayed separately from the list display, and the display in which only the error code of E1 is blinked is displayed by the first display mode of the second error display ES21 or the first display mode of the second error display having the same contents. It may be performed together with the display ES21'.

Further, the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 53B outputs a second error sound due to a voice such as "door opening error", and the error detected by the slot machine 100 by the voice output is also a door opening error. Can be identified. That is, the second error sound also corresponds to a kind of error notification that can identify that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is a door opening error.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 53 (b) remains hidden, and no error notification is performed.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means after the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display and the display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second error display of the same content are started.

Also in FIG. 54, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display device 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as examples of the notification means.

FIG. 54 (a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state continuing from FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 54 shows the aspect ratio (14:25) of the display screen 1571 in the first image display device 157, and also the aspect ratio (11: 6) of the display screen 1581 in the second image display device 158. It is shown. The aspect ratios of the two are expressed on the same scale, and the vertical length of the horizontal display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 is larger than the vertical length of the vertical display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. The length is longer.

The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 54 (a), and the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display is also displayed. Further, in the same area as the area where the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" shown in FIG. 53 (a) is displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1), "door error" is called. The character display is displayed. This "door error" is an abbreviation display of the door opening error, corresponds to an error display specifying the door opening error, and corresponds to a kind of second error display. Hereinafter, the character display of "door error" is referred to as display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display. The display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display blinks while the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display is displayed. Therefore, the second error display has two types of display modes, and the display ES21 and ES22 of these two types of display modes have a period in which they are executed in duplicate. The abbreviation display such as "door error" may be changed to a formal display such as "door opening error" to perform the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display. FIG. 54A also shows the aspect ratio (3:10) of the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display. This aspect ratio is expressed on the same scale as the aspect ratio of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and is displayed by the second display mode of the second error display with respect to the horizontal length of the display screen 1571. The ratio of the lateral lengths of ES22 is 10/25. Further, the ratio of the vertical length of the display ES 22 according to the second display mode of the second error display to the vertical length of the display screen 1571 is 3/14.

The same content error list display EL1'is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 54 (a), and the display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second same content error display. Is also displayed. Further, in the same area as the area where the first error display ES10'with the same content "error occurred" shown in FIG. 53 (a) was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1'with the same content). , The character display of "door error" having the same content as the display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. Hereinafter, the character display of "door error" on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is referred to as a display ES22'in the second display mode of the second same content error display. The display ES22'by the second display mode of the second same content error display is also the display ES22'by the second display mode of the second error display during the display of the display ES21'by the first display mode of the second same content error display. Flashes in synchronization with the flashing display of. Therefore, the second same content error display also has two types of display modes, and the display ES21'and ES22'of these two types of display modes have a period in which they are executed in duplicate. The abbreviation display such as "door error" may be changed to a formal display such as "door opening error", and the display ES22'in the second display mode of the second same content error display may be performed. FIG. 54A also shows the aspect ratio (0.9: 3) of the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display. This aspect ratio is expressed on the same scale as the aspect ratio of the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, and is the second display mode of the second same content error display with respect to the horizontal length of the display screen 1581. The ratio of the lateral length of the display ES22'is 3/6. Further, the ratio of the vertical length of the display ES 22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display to the vertical length of the display screen 1581 is 0.9 / 11. It should be noted that the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display is larger than the display ES22'by the second display mode of the second error display of the same content.

As is clear from FIG. 54 (a), the lateral direction from the end of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 to the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571. The distance is longer than the lateral distance from the end of the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 to the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display displayed on the display screen 1581. Further, the vertical distance from the end of the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 to the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571 is also the second image display device 158. It is longer than the vertical distance from the end of the display screen 1581 to the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display displayed on the display screen 1581. The distance in the horizontal direction, the distance in the vertical direction, or conversely, may be short. In the past, even if an error was displayed on one display screen, the player might not notice it, but by displaying the error on a different display screen, the player may be aware that an error has occurred. You may be able to do it. Further, by making the distance from the edge of the display screen to the error display different for each display screen, it may be easier for the player to notice that the error has occurred. In particular, both the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display and the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second error display of the same content are horizontally long displays, so that the distance in the horizontal direction is large. By being different, even if the same content is displayed, different impressions can be given, and it becomes easier to attract the attention of the player. For example, on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, a small but clogged display is displayed, which easily attracts the attention of the player.

Further, as is clear from FIG. 54 (a), the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 is the display screen of the second image display device 158. It is a display larger than the display ES21'by the first display mode of the second same content error display displayed in 1581.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 54 (a), a voice output such as a second error sound “door opening error” is continued. The second error sound may be an audio output such as "door error".

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 54 (a) is still in a hidden state, and no error notification is performed.

FIG. 54 (b) shown on the right side of FIG. 54 shows the state after the display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display and the display ES22'by the second display mode of the second error display of the same content is started. It is shown.

The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 54 (b), and the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display is also displayed. Further, in the area where the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display is displayed, the characters "door is open" are displayed in a frame of a certain background color (gray in this case). There is. The frame display on which the characters "door is open" is displayed corresponds to a display indicating the state of the slot machine 100 in which the door opening error has occurred, and is hereinafter referred to as a state display SS10. The status display SS10 can also be seen as an aspect of error display. The size of the status display SS10 is larger than the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display. Further, while the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display is a blinking display, the status display SS10 is a lighting display that continues to be lit without being momentarily extinguished. The status display SS10 and the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display are alternately displayed.

The same content error list display EL1'is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 54 (b), and the display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second same content error display. Is also displayed. Further, in the area where the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display is displayed, a "door" having the same content as the state display SS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. Is open "is displayed. This character display is also a frame display displayed in a frame of a certain background color (here, gray). Hereinafter, the frame display in which the characters "door is open" is displayed is referred to as the same content status display SS10'. The same content status display SS10'can also be seen as an aspect of error display. The background color of the same content status display SS10'and the background color of the status display SS10 are the same color, but may be different colors. The size of the same content status display SS10'is larger than the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display. Further, the same content status display SS10'and the display ES22'in the second display mode of the second same content error display are alternately displayed.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 54 (b), a state notification sound such as "the door is open" is output, and the state of the slot machine 100 in which the door opening error has occurred is also notified by the voice output. .. From the speaker 180, the voice "door is open" (state notification sound) and the voice "door open error" (second error sound) are alternately output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 54 (b) is still in a hidden state, and no error notification is performed.

The notification mode after the door opening error described above is detected will be described again using the timing chart.

FIG. 55 is a timing chart of the notification mode after the door opening error is detected. In FIG. 55, time elapses from the left to the right of the figure.

FIG. 55 shows a notification mode in each of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display device 127.

First, the door open error is detected by the open sensor. When a door opening error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying the first error display ES10 such as "error occurred" and the error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also starts displaying "error occurred". 1 The display of the same content error display ES10'and the same content error list display EL1'starts. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error has occurred". The payout number display 127 is in a hidden state in which nothing is displayed.

The display of the first error display ES10, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the first error display ES10'with the same content, the display of the error list display EL1'with the same content, and the output of the first error sound are started. It is performed at the same timing, and when a predetermined time elapses, the display of the first error display ES10, the display of the first error display ES10'with the same content, and the output of the first error sound end at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the error list display EL1'with the same contents are continuously displayed even after a predetermined time has elapsed. The display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the error list display EL1'with the same contents continue to be displayed until the door opening error is cleared.

When the display of the first error display ES10 is completed in the first image display device 157, the display of the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display in which the door opening error can be specified is started. The display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display continues to be displayed until the door opening error is cleared. The display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display is a lighting display, but may be a display in which the thick square frame display blinks. In this case, until the door opening error is cleared. The blinking display will be repeated.

When the display of the first same content error display ES10'is completed in the second image display device 158, the display of the display ES21'in the first display mode of the second same content error display in which the door opening error can be specified is started. .. The display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second same content error display also continues to be displayed until the door opening error is cleared. The display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second same content error display is also a lighting display, but the thick square frame display may be a blinking display. In this case, the door opening error is canceled. The blinking display will be repeated until it is displayed.

When the output of the first error sound is completed in the speaker 180, the output of the second error sound such as "door opening error" is started. The payout number display 127 remains hidden.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time elapses after the display of the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display is started, the display of the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display is displayed. The status display SS10 such as "The door is open" will be displayed alternately. That is, after the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display is blinking and displayed, the status display SS10 is lit and displayed, and the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display is blinking and displayed again. The alternating display is repeated until the door open error is cleared. In this alternate display, the display period of the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display and the display period of the status display SS10 are the same length, but the display period of the former is long and the display period of the latter is short. On the contrary, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the display ES21'in the first display mode of the second same content error display, the display in the second display mode of the second same content error display is performed. After the flashing display of ES22', the same content status display SS10'is lit and displayed, and the display ES22'in the second display mode of the second same content error display is flashing again, and so on. Repeated until the error is cleared. The alternate display in the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display in the first image display device 157.

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined time elapses after the output of the second error sound such as "door open error" is started, the second error sound is switched to the state notification sound such as "door is open". This switching timing is synchronized with the timing at which the display of the status display is started on the first image display device 157. The status notification sound and the second error sound are output alternately until the door opening error is cleared. The output switching timing of the status notification sound and the second error sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing of the display ES22 according to the display of the status display and the second display mode of the second error display in the first image display device 157.

In the example shown in FIG. 55, the payout number display 127 remains hidden until the door opening error is cleared.

In addition, the display name in the second image display device 158 is described by adding the wording "same content" to the display name in the first image display device 157 to distinguish between the two, but since the display contents are the same. , Both displays may be handled without distinction.

Further, the speaker 180 outputs three different sounds such as a first error sound, a second error sound, and a status notification sound, but the same sound is consistently output from the stage when the door opening error is detected. You may try to do it. For example, the first error sound may be continuously output, the second error sound may be continuously output, or the state notification sound may be continuously output from the detection of the door opening error to the resolution of the error. However, a non-voice alarm sound may continue to be output.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means when an empty hopper error with an error code of E2 is detected.

Also in FIG. 56, as in FIG. 53, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display device 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as an example of the notification means. It should be noted that the description may be omitted for the content that overlaps with the content described with reference to FIG. 53.

FIG. 56 (a) shown on the left side of the figure shows the state immediately after the hopper empty error is detected.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 56 (a), a background display for error notification expressed in a single color (here, a single white color) is displayed. ing. Further, on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" is blinking and displayed. Further, the error list display EL1 is always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, but the error display that can identify that the generated error is a hopper empty error is not yet displayed. ..

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 56 (a), the first error display ES10'with the same content of "error occurred" is displayed blinking in synchronization with the blinking display of the first error display ES10. There is. Further, the same content error list display EL1'is displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, but the error display that can identify that the generated error is a hopper empty error is not displayed. ..

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 56 (a), the first error sound due to the voice such as "error occurrence" is output, but the voice "hopper empty error" is not output.

Unlike the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 53 (a), the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 56 (a) displays E2, which is an error code of the detected error. Even a person who does not remember the error code can know the error name by looking at the error list display EL1 and the error list display EL1'with the same contents. Therefore, it can be said that the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 56A displays an error display that can identify the hopper empty error. However, since the payout number display 127 displays the number of medals, it is highly likely that only a person who knows that the error display will be displayed on the payout number display 127 will notice, but at least the game. The store clerk notices. Immediately after the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the error display on the payout number display 127 that can identify that the generated error is the hopper empty error can be said to be an error display for the clerk, even if the player does not know. The clerk can immediately identify that the error that occurred is a hopper empty error.

In FIG. 56 (b) shown on the right side of FIG. 56, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first error display ES10 has the same contents from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. The state after'disappears is shown.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first error display ES10'with the same contents disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 in which the first error display ES10 has disappeared. When the first error display ES10 disappears, the error list display EL1 displays a display for specifying the error that has occurred. Here, as an error display for specifying the hopper empty error, the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error is surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display for specifying the hopper empty error is referred to as a third error display ES30. The display mode of the third error display ES30 is a display mode in which the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error displayed on the error list display EL1 is surrounded by a thick square frame.

Further, the same content error list display EL1'is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 from which the first same content error display ES10'has disappeared. When the first error display ES10'with the same content disappears, the error display EL1'with the same content also displays to identify the error that has occurred. Again, as an error display for specifying the hopper empty error, the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error is surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display for specifying the hopper empty error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is referred to as the third error display ES30'with the same contents. The display mode of the third same content error display ES30'is a display mode in which the character display of the E2 and the hopper empty error displayed on the same content error list display EL1'is surrounded by a thick square frame.

Whether the third error display ES30 or the third error display ES30'has the same content, the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error may be blinking. Alternatively, eight error codes are displayed separately from the list display, and as another display mode of the third error display ES30 and the third error display ES30'with the same content, a display in which only the error code of E3 is blinked is displayed in a thick square frame. It may be performed together with the display of the display mode surrounded by.

Further, the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 56B outputs a third error sound due to a voice such as "hopper empty error", and the error detected by the slot machine 100 by the voice output is also a hopper empty error. Can be identified. That is, the third error sound also corresponds to a kind of error notification that can identify that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is a hopper empty error.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 56B still displays E2, which is an error code for a hopper empty error.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means after the third error display ES30 and the third error display ES30'with the same contents are started.

Also in FIG. 57, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display device 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as examples of the notification means.

FIG. 57 (a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state continuing from FIG. 56 (b).

The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 57 (a), and the third error display ES30 is also displayed. Further, in the same area as the area where the first error display ES10 "Error occurred" shown in FIG. 57 (a) was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1), "Call a clerk. Is displayed. This character display "Please call a clerk" corresponds to a kind of instruction notification indicating an instruction to the player. Hereinafter, the character display "Please call a clerk" is referred to as an instruction display IS10. The instruction display IS10 blinks while the third error display ES30 is being displayed. Therefore, the instruction display IS10 and the third error display ES30 have a period in which they are executed in duplicate.

The same content error list display EL1'is always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 57 (a), and the third content error display ES30'is also displayed. Further, in the same area as the area where the first error display ES10'with the same content "error occurred" shown in FIG. 56A was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1'with the same content). , The character display "Please call a clerk" having the same content as the instruction display IS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158 is displayed. Hereinafter, the character display of "Please call a clerk" on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is referred to as the same content instruction display IS10'. The same content instruction display IS10'also blinks in synchronization with the blinking display of the instruction display IS10 during the display of the third same content error display ES30'. Therefore, the same content instruction display IS10'and the third same content error display ES30' have a period in which they are executed in duplicate.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 57 (a), an instruction notification sound such as "Please call a clerk" is output. That is, the third error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound. Even if the instruction display IS10 is displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the third error sound may be continuously output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 57 (a) still displays the error code E2 of the hopper empty error.

FIG. 57 (b) shown on the right side of FIG. 57 shows a state after the display of the instruction display IS10 and the same content instruction display IS10'is started.

The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 57B, and the third error display ES30 is also displayed. Further, in the area where the instruction display IS10 is displayed, the characters "Please replenish the medals and press the reset switch" are displayed in the frame of a certain background color (gray in this case). The frame display in which the characters "Please replenish the medals and press the reset switch" are displayed corresponds to the explanation notification explaining how to cancel the hopper empty error that has occurred. Refer to. The first error release explanation display RS10 can also be seen as an aspect of error display. Further, the first error release explanation display RS10 can also be seen as an aspect of error display that can identify that the generated error is a hopper empty error. Further, the size of the first error release explanation display RS10 is about the same as the size of the instruction display IS10, but the instruction display IS10 is a blinking display, whereas the first error release explanation display RS10 is a lighting display. be. This is because the first error release explanation display RS10 has a larger number of characters displayed than the instruction display IS10, so it is lit so that it can be read firmly. The first error release explanation display RS10 and the instruction display IS10 are displayed alternately. The first error release explanation display RS10 may be displayed larger than the instruction display IS10.

The same content error list display EL1'is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 57 (b), and the display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second same content error display. Is also displayed. Further, in the area where the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display is displayed, it is the same as the first error cancellation explanation display RS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158. The text "Please replenish the medals and press the reset switch" is displayed. This character display is also a frame display displayed in a frame of a certain background color (here, gray). Hereinafter, the frame display in which the characters "Please replenish the medals and press the reset switch" are displayed is referred to as the first same content error release explanation display RS10'. The first error release explanation display RS10'with the same content can be regarded as one aspect of the error display, or can be regarded as one aspect of the error display in which it can be specified that the generated error is a hopper empty error. The background color of the first same content error release explanation display RS10'and the background color of the same content instruction display IS10' are different colors, but they may be the same color. Further, the size of the first content error release explanation display RS10'is about the same as the size of the same content instruction display IS10', but the same content instruction display IS10'is blinking, whereas the first The same content error release explanation display RS10'is a lighting display. The first same content error release explanation display RS10'and the same content instruction display IS10' are displayed alternately. The first same content error release explanation display RS10'may be displayed larger than the same content instruction display IS10'.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 57 (b), an explanation of a method of canceling an error by voice such as "please replenish medals and press the reset switch" is given. Hereinafter, this voice is referred to as a first error release explanatory notification sound. From the speaker 180, the first error release explanation notification sound and the instruction notification sound such as "Call a clerk" are alternately output. It should be noted that the speaker 180 may output only the instruction notification sound without outputting the first error cancellation explanation notification sound.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 57 (a) still displays the error code E2 of the hopper empty error.

The notification mode after the hopper empty error described above is detected will be described again using the timing chart.

FIG. 58 is a timing chart of the notification mode after the hopper empty error is detected. Also in FIG. 58, the time elapses from the left to the right of the figure, and the notification mode in each of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display device 127 is described. ing.

First, a hopper empty error is detected. When a hopper empty error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying the first error display ES10 such as "error occurred" and the error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also starts displaying "error occurred". 1 The display of the same content error display ES10'and the same content error list display EL1'starts. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error has occurred". Further, when a hopper empty error is detected, the error code (here, E2) of the error that has occurred is displayed on the payout number display 127. First error display ES10 display start, error list display EL1 display start, first same content error display ES10'display start, same content error list display EL1'display start, first error sound output start, and payout. The error code display on the number display 127 is started at the same timing, and when a predetermined time elapses, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first error display ES10'is displayed, and the first error sound is output. Ends at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the error list display EL1'with the same content, and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 are continuously displayed even after a predetermined time has elapsed. The display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the error list display EL1'with the same contents continue to be displayed until the hopper empty error is cleared. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58, the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is cleared.

Among the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display device 127, the payout number display device 127 may start the error code notification fastest. As described above, it can be said that the notification of the error code on the payout number display 127 is an error display for the clerk, and the clerk may be notified that the hopper empty error has occurred as soon as possible.

When the display of the first error display ES10 is completed in the first image display device 157, the display of the third error display ES30 in which the hopper empty error can be specified is started. This third error display ES30 continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is cleared. Although the third error display ES30 is a lighting display, the thick square frame display may be a blinking display. In this case, the blinking display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. Become.

When the display of the first same content error display ES10'is completed in the second image display device 158, the display of the third same content error display ES30'in which a hopper empty error can be specified is started. This third error display ES30'with the same content also continues to be displayed until the hopper empty error is cleared. The third error display ES30'with the same content is also a lighting display, but the thick square frame display may be a blinking display. In this case, the blinking display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. Will be.

When the output of the first error sound is completed in the speaker 180, the output of the third error sound such as "hopper empty error" is started. The error code (E2) of the hopper empty error continues to be displayed on the payout number display 127.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the third error display ES30 was started, the instruction display IS10 such as "Call a clerk" and "Replenish medals and press the reset switch." The first error release explanation display RS10 and the like will be displayed alternately. That is, after the instruction display IS10 is blinking, the first error release explanation display RS10 is lit and displayed, the instruction display IS10 is blinking again, and so on, and the alternate display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. .. In this alternate display, the display period of the instruction display IS10 and the display period of the first error release explanation display RS10 are the same length, but the former display period may be longer and the latter display period may be shorter, or the opposite. In addition, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the third same content error display ES30', the same content instruction display IS10'is blinked and then the first same content error cancellation explanation is given. The display RS10'is lit and the same content instruction display IS10'is blinked again, and so on. The alternate display is repeated until the hopper empty error is cleared. The alternate display in the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display in the first image display device 157.

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined time elapses after the output of the third error sound such as "hopper empty error" is started, the third error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound such as "call a clerk". This switching timing is synchronized with the timing at which the display of the instruction display is started on the first image display device 157. Further, in synchronization with the timing when the first error release explanation display RS10 is started on the first image display device 157, the speaker 180 also notifies the first error release explanation such as "Please replenish the medals and press the reset switch". Sound is output. The instruction notification sound and the first error cancellation explanation notification sound are alternately output from the speaker 180 until the hopper empty error is cleared. The output switching timing of the instruction notification sound and the first error release explanation sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing of the instruction display IS10 and the first error release explanation display RS10 in the first image display device 157.

Also here, the display name in the second image display device 158 is described by adding the wording "same content" to the display name in the first image display device 157 to distinguish between the two, but the display contents are the same. Therefore, both displays may be handled without distinction.

Further, the speaker 180 outputs four different sounds such as a first error sound, a third error sound, an instruction notification sound, and a first error cancellation explanation notification sound, but a hopper empty error is detected. The same sound may be output consistently from the initial stage. For example, the first error sound may be continuously output, the third error sound may be continuously output, or the instruction notification sound may be continuously output from the detection of the hopper empty error to the resolution of the error. However, the first error release explanation notification sound may continue to be output, or a non-voice alarm sound may continue to be output.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means when a medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7 is detected.

Also in FIG. 59, as in FIG. 56, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display device 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as an example of the notification means. It should be noted that the description may be omitted for the content that overlaps with the content described with reference to FIG. 56.

FIG. 59 (a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state immediately after the medal passage confirmation error is detected.

On the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 and the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 59 (a), a background display for error notification expressed in a single color (here, a single white color) is displayed. ing. Further, on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" is blinking and displayed. Further, although the error list display EL1 is always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, an error display that can identify that the error that has occurred is a medal passage confirmation error is still displayed. No.

On the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first error display ES10'with the same content of "error occurred" is blinking and displayed in synchronization with the blinking display of the first error display ES10. There is. Further, although the error list display EL1'with the same content is displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158, an error display that can identify that the generated error is a medal passage confirmation error is displayed. No.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first error sound such as "error occurrence" is output, but the voice "medal passage confirmation error" is not output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 59 (a) displays E7, which is an error code of the detected error.

In FIG. 59 (b) shown on the right side of FIG. 59, the first error display ES10 disappears from the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, and the first error display ES10 has the same contents from the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158. The state after'disappears is shown.

Both the first error display ES10 and the first error display ES10'with the same contents disappear from the display screens 1571 and 1581 at the same timing. The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 in which the first error display ES10 has disappeared. When the first error display ES10 disappears, the error list display EL1 displays a display for specifying the error that has occurred. Here, as an error display for specifying the medal passage confirmation error, the character display of E7 and the medal passage confirmation error is surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display for specifying the medal passage confirmation error is referred to as the fourth error display ES40. The display mode of the fourth error display ES40 is a display mode in which the character display of the E7 and the medal passage confirmation error displayed on the error list display EL1 is surrounded by a thick square frame.

Further, the same content error list display EL1'is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 from which the first same content error display ES10'has disappeared. When the first error display ES10'with the same content disappears, the error display EL1'with the same content also displays to identify the error that has occurred. Here, as an error display for specifying the medal passage confirmation error, the character display of E7 and the medal passage confirmation error is surrounded by a thick square frame. Hereinafter, the error display for specifying the medal passage confirmation error on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 is referred to as the fourth error display ES40'with the same contents. The fourth display mode of the same content error display ES40'is a display mode in which the character display of the E7 and the medal passage confirmation error displayed on the same content error list display EL1'is surrounded by a thick square frame.

Whether the fourth error display ES40 or the fourth error display E70'has the same content, the character display of E7 and the medal passage confirmation error may be blinking. Alternatively, eight error codes are displayed separately from the list display, and as another display mode of the fourth error display ES40 and the fourth error display E70', the display in which only the error code of E7 is blinked is displayed in a thick square frame. It may be performed together with the display of the display mode surrounded by.

Further, the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 59 (b) outputs a fourth error sound by voice such as "medal passage confirmation error", and the error detected by the slot machine 100 is also a medal passage confirmation error by the voice output. It becomes possible to identify something. That is, the fourth error sound also corresponds to a kind of error notification that can identify that the error detected by the slot machine 100 is a medal passage confirmation error.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 59B still displays the error code E7 of the medal passage confirmation error.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the state of various notification means after the fourth error display ES40 and the fourth error display ES40'with the same contents are started.

Also in FIG. 60, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display device 127, and the speaker 180 are illustrated as examples of the notification means.

FIG. 60 (a) shown on the left side of the figure shows a state continuing from FIG. 59 (b).

The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 60 (a), and the fourth error display ES40 is also displayed. Further, "Call a clerk" in the same area as the area where the first error display ES10 "Error occurred" shown in FIG. 60 (a) was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1). The instruction display IS10 is blinking. The instruction display IS10 here also has a period in which it is executed in duplicate with the fourth error display ES40.

The same content error list display EL1'is always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 60 (a), and the fourth content error display ES40'is also displayed. Further, in the same area as the area where the first error display ES10'with the same content "error occurred" shown in FIG. 59 (a) was displayed (the area to the right of the display area of the error list display EL1'with the same content). , The same content instruction display IS10'with the same content as the instruction display IS10 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158, such as "Please call a clerk" is displayed. This same content instruction display IS10'also blinks in synchronization with the blinking display of the instruction display IS10 during the display of the fourth same content error display ES40'. Therefore, the same content instruction display IS10'and the fourth same content error display ES40' have a period in which they are executed in duplicate.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 60 (a), an instruction notification sound such as "Please call a clerk" is output. That is, the third error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound. Even if the instruction display IS10 is displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157, the third error sound may be continuously output.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 60 (a) still displays the error code E7 of the medal passage confirmation error.

FIG. 60 (b) shown on the right side of FIG. 60 shows a state after the display of the instruction display IS10 and the same content instruction display IS10'is started.

The error list display EL1 is still always displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first image display device 157 shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the fourth error display ES40 is also displayed. Further, in the area where the instruction display IS10 is displayed, the characters "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" are displayed in the frame of a certain background color (gray in this case). The frame display in which the characters "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" is displayed corresponds to an explanatory notification explaining how to cancel the generated medal passage confirmation error, and is hereinafter referred to as the second error cancellation explanation display RS20. .. Like the first error release explanation display RS10, the second error release explanation display RS20 can also be seen as an aspect of the error display, and one of the error displays that can identify that the generated error is a medal passage confirmation error. It can also be seen as an aspect. Further, the size of the second error release explanation display RS20 is about the same as the size of the instruction display IS10, but while the instruction display IS10 is a blinking display, the second error release explanation display RS20 is also the first. Error release explanation display Similar to RS10, it is a lighting display so that many displayed characters can be read firmly. The second error release explanation display RS20 and the instruction display IS10 are displayed alternately. The second error release explanation display RS20 may be displayed larger than the instruction display IS10.

The same content error list display EL1'is still always displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second same content error display. Is also displayed. Further, in the area where the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display is displayed, it is the same as the second error release explanation display RS20 displayed on the display screen 1581 of the first image display device 158. The frame display of the contents is displayed. This frame display is also displayed in a certain background color (here, gray), and is hereinafter referred to as the second same content error release explanation display RS20'. The second error release explanation display RS20'with the same content can be regarded as one aspect of the error display, or can be regarded as one aspect of the error display in which it can be specified that the generated error is a medal passage confirmation error. The background color of the second same content error release explanation display RS20'and the background color of the same content instruction display IS10' are different colors, but they may be the same color. Further, the size of the second content error release explanation display RS20'is about the same as the size of the same content instruction display IS10', but the same content instruction display IS10'was blinking, whereas the second content instruction display IS10'was blinking. The same content error release explanation display RS20'is a lighting display. The second same content error release explanation display RS20'and the same content instruction display IS10'are displayed alternately. The second same content error release explanation display RS20'may be displayed larger than the same content instruction display IS10'.

From the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 60 (b), an explanation of a method of canceling an error by voice such as "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" is explained. Hereinafter, this voice is referred to as a second error release explanatory notification sound. From the speaker 180, the second error release explanation notification sound and the instruction notification sound such as "Call a clerk" are alternately output. It should be noted that the speaker 180 may output only the instruction notification sound without outputting the second error cancellation explanation notification sound.

The payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 60 (a) still displays the error code E7 of the medal passage confirmation error.

The notification mode after the medal passage confirmation error described above is detected will be described again using the timing chart.

FIG. 61 is a timing chart of the notification mode after the medal passage confirmation error is detected. Also in FIG. 61, the time elapses from the left to the right of the figure, and the notification mode in each of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display device 127 is described. ing.

First, a medal passage confirmation error is detected. When a medal passage confirmation error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying the first error display ES10 such as "error occurred" and the error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also says "error occurred". The display of the first error display ES10'with the same content and the error list display EL1'with the same content is started. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error has occurred". Further, when a medal passage confirmation error is detected, the error code (here, E7) of the error that has occurred is displayed on the payout number display 127. First error display ES10 display start, error list display EL1 display start, first same content error display ES10'display start, same content error list display EL1'display start, first error sound output start, and payout. The error code display on the number display 127 is started at the same timing, and when a predetermined time elapses, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first error display ES10'is displayed, and the first error sound is output. Ends at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the error list display EL1'with the same content, and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 are continuously displayed even after a predetermined time has elapsed. The display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the error list display EL1'with the same contents continue to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61, the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 continues to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared.

Among the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display device 127, the payout number display device 127 may start the error code notification fastest.

When the display of the first error display ES10 is completed in the first image display device 157, the display of the fourth error display ES40 in which the medal passage confirmation error can be specified is started. This fourth error display ES40 continues to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. Although the fourth error display ES40 is a lighting display, the thick square frame display may be a blinking display. In this case, the blinking display is repeated until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. become.

When the display of the first same content error display ES10'is completed in the second image display device 158, the display of the fourth same content error display ES40'in which the medal passage confirmation error can be specified is started. The fourth error display ES40'with the same content continues to be displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. The fourth error display ES40'with the same content is also a lighting display, but the thick square frame display may be a blinking display. In this case, the blinking display is displayed until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. It will be repeated.

When the output of the first error sound is completed in the speaker 180, the output of the fourth error sound such as "medal passage confirmation error" is started. The error code (E7) of the medal passage confirmation error continues to be displayed on the payout number display 127.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the fourth error display ES40 was started, the instruction display IS10 such as "Call a clerk" and "Remove the medal and press the reset switch" are displayed. The second error release explanation display RS20 and RS20 are displayed alternately. That is, after the instruction display IS10 is blinking, the second error release explanation display RS20 is lit and displayed, the instruction display IS10 is blinking again, and so on, and the alternate display is repeated until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. Is done. In this alternate display, the display period of the instruction display IS10 and the display period of the second error release explanation display RS20 are the same length, but the former display period may be longer and the latter display period may be shorter, or the opposite. In addition, the former display period may be short and the latter display period may be long.

In the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the fourth same content error display ES40', the same content instruction display IS10'is blinked and then the second same content error cancellation explanation is given. The display RS20'is lit and the same content instruction display IS10'is blinked again, and so on. The alternate display is repeated until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. The alternate display in the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display in the first image display device 157.

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined time elapses after the output of the fourth error sound such as "medal passage confirmation error" is started, the fourth error sound is switched to the instruction notification sound such as "call a clerk". This switching timing is synchronized with the timing at which the display of the instruction display is started on the first image display device 157. Further, in synchronization with the timing when the second error release explanation display RS20 is started on the first image display device 157, the speaker 180 also emits a second error release explanation notification sound such as "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch". It is output. The instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound are alternately output from the speaker 180 until the medal passage confirmation error is cleared. The output switching timing of the instruction notification sound and the second error release explanation notification sound is also synchronized with the display switching timing of the instruction display IS10 and the second error release explanation display RS20 in the first image display device 157.

Also here, the display name in the second image display device 158 is described by adding the wording "same content" to the display name in the first image display device 157 to distinguish between the two, but the display contents are the same. Therefore, both displays may be handled without distinction.

Further, the speaker 180 outputs four different sounds such as a first error sound, a fourth error sound, an instruction notification sound, and a second error cancellation explanation notification sound, but a medal passage confirmation error is detected. The same sound may be output consistently from the stage when it is done. For example, the first error sound may be continuously output, the fourth error sound may be continuously output, or the instruction notification sound may be continuously output from the detection of the medal passage confirmation error to the resolution of the error. Alternatively, the second error release explanation notification sound may continue to be output, or a non-voice alarm sound may continue to be output.

Further, the description using FIGS. 59 to 61 was a description in which a medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7 was detected, but it is also possible that various errors with error codes E3 to E6 and E8 are detected. Similar error notification is performed. That is, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" and the first error display ES10'with the same content "error occurrence" are displayed, and the first error sound such as "error occurrence" is output. After that, the error display in which the target error code and error name in the error list display EL1 are surrounded by a thick square frame, and the target error code and error name in the error list display EL1'with the same contents are displayed in a thick square. An error display surrounded by a frame is performed, and the instruction display IS10 and the second error release explanation display RS20 are alternately displayed, and the same content instruction display IS10'and the second same content error release explanation display RS20'are also displayed alternately. Further, after the voice output of the error name is performed from the speaker 180, the instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound are alternately output.

Subsequently, a case where error notifications overlap will be described.

FIG. 62 is a timing chart when a door opening error is detected before the hopper empty error is detected and the error is resolved. Also in FIG. 62, the time elapses from the left to the right of the figure, and the notification mode in each of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display device 127 is described. ing.

First, a hopper empty error is detected. When a hopper empty error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying the first error display ES10 such as "error occurred" and the error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also starts displaying "error occurred". 1 The display of the same content error display ES10'and the same content error list display EL1'starts. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error has occurred". Further, when a hopper empty error is detected, the error code (here, E2) of the error that has occurred is displayed on the payout number display 127. First error display ES10 display start, error list display EL1 display start, first same content error display ES10'display start, same content error list display EL1'display start, first error sound output start, and payout. The error code display on the number display 127 is started at the same timing, and when a predetermined time elapses, the first error display ES10 is displayed, the first error display ES10'is displayed, and the first error sound is output. Ends at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the error list display EL1'with the same content, and the display of the error code on the payout number display 127 are continuously displayed even after a predetermined time has elapsed.

When the display of the first error display ES10 is completed in the first image display device 157, the display of the third error display ES30 in which the hopper empty error can be specified is started. Further, in the second image display device 158, when the display of the first same content error display ES10'is completed, the display of the third same content error display ES30'in which a hopper empty error can be specified is started.

When the output of the first error sound is completed in the speaker 180, the output of the third error sound such as "hopper empty error" is started. The error code (E2) of the hopper empty error continues to be displayed on the payout number display 127.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the third error display ES30, the instruction display IS10 such as "Call a clerk" and "Replenish medals and press the reset switch." The first error release explanation display RS10 and the like will be displayed alternately. Further, in the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of the third same content error display ES30', the same content instruction display IS10'and the first same content error release explanation display RS10' Will be displayed alternately. The alternate display in the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display in the first image display device 157.

In the speaker 180, when a predetermined time elapses after the output of the third error sound such as "hopper empty error" is started, the instruction display IS10 and the first error release explanation display RS10 in the first image display device 157 are alternately displayed. In synchronization with, an instruction notification sound such as "Call a clerk" and a first error cancellation explanation notification sound such as "Replenish medals and press the reset switch" are alternately output.

The error code (E2) is continuously displayed on the payout number display 127.

A door opening error is detected while the second instruction notification (display of instruction display IS10, display of the same content instruction display IS10', output of instruction notification sound) is being performed. However, even if the door open error is detected in the state where the hopper empty error is not cleared, the error notification based on the detection of the door open error is not started at all, and the error notification regarding the hopper empty error continues. That is, the display of the first error display ES10 such as "error occurrence", the display of the first error display ES10'and the output of the first error sound, and the display of the second error displays ES21 and ES22 that can identify the door opening error. The display of the second error display ES21'and ES22' and the output of the second error sound are not started, and the first image display device 157 alternately displays the instruction display IS10 and the first error release explanation display RS10. In the second image display device 158, the same content instruction display IS10'and the first error release explanation display RS10'are alternately displayed, and in the speaker 180, the instruction notification sound and the first error release explanation notification sound are alternately output. Continues. Further, the error code (E2) is continuously displayed on the payout number display 127. Although the error list display EL1 is continuously displayed on the first image display device 157, the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error in the error list display EL1 is surrounded by a thick square frame. 3 Error display ES30 continues to be displayed. Further, although the same content error list display EL1'is continuously displayed on the second image display device 158, the character display of E2 and the hopper empty error in the same content error list display EL1'is displayed in a square. The third error display ES30'with the same content surrounded by a thick frame continues to be displayed.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 62, the error that occurred earlier was an empty hopper error with an error code of E2, but even if the error code is an error of E3 to E8, those errors are cleared. Even if a door open error is detected in a state where the error has not been set, the error notification based on the detection of the door open error is not started at all. By doing so, the clerk of the amusement store may be able to concentrate on dealing with the error that occurred earlier. Further, the door opening error is a simple error that is canceled when the front door 102 is closed, whereas the E2-E8 error is a complicated error that involves the work of replenishing and removing medals, so the door is a door. It is notified with priority over the release error. In other words, in the error notification, the error for which the error release explanation notification is performed is notified with priority over the error for which the error cancellation explanation notification is not performed.

FIG. 63 is a timing chart when a medal passage confirmation error is detected before the door opening error is detected and the error is resolved. Also in FIG. 63, the time elapses from the left to the right of the figure, and the notification mode in each of the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180, and the payout number display device 127 is described. ing.

First, a door open error is detected. When a door opening error is detected, the first image display device 157 starts displaying the first error display ES10 such as "error occurred" and the error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 also starts displaying "error occurred". 1 The display of the same content error display ES10'and the same content error list display EL1'starts. Further, the speaker 180 outputs a first error sound such as "error has occurred". The payout number display 127 is in a hidden state in which nothing is displayed. The display of the first error display ES10, the display of the error list display EL1, the display of the first error display ES10'with the same content, the display of the error list display EL1'with the same content, and the output of the first error sound are started. It is performed at the same timing, and when a predetermined time elapses, the display of the first error display ES10, the display of the first error display ES10'with the same content, and the output of the first error sound end at the same timing. On the other hand, the display of the error list display EL1 and the display of the error list display EL1'with the same contents are continuously displayed even after a predetermined time has elapsed.

When the display of the first error display ES10 is completed in the first image display device 157, the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display in which the door opening error can be specified is started. Further, in the second image display device 158, when the display of the first same content error display ES10'is completed, the display ES21'in the first display mode of the second same content error display in which the door opening error can be specified is started. ..

When the output of the first error sound is completed in the speaker 180, the output of the second error sound such as "door opening error" is started. The payout number display 127 remains hidden.

In the first image display device 157, when a predetermined time elapses after the display ES21 in the first display mode of the second error display is started, the display ES22 in the second display mode of the second error display such as "door error" is displayed. The display and the status display SS10 such as "the door is open" will be displayed alternately. Further, in the second image display device 158, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display ES21'in the first display mode of the second same content error display, the second same content error display such as "door error" is displayed. 2 The display ES22'in the display mode and the same content status display SS10' such as "the door is open" are alternately displayed. The alternate display in the second image display device 158 is performed in synchronization with the alternate display in the first image display device 157.

After the output of the second error sound such as "door error" is started in the speaker 180, the state notification sound such as "door is open" is synchronized with the display start of the state display SS10 in the first image display device 157. Is output, and thereafter, the second error sound and the state notification sound are alternately output. This alternating output from the speaker 180 is performed in synchronization with the display of the display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display and the alternate display of the status display SS10 in the first image display device 157. The payout number display 127 remains hidden.

A medal passage confirmation error is detected while the display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display such as the second "door error" is being performed. Then, even if the door opening error is not cleared, the error notification regarding the door opening error ends, and instead, the error notification based on the detection of the medal passage confirmation error is started. That is, the display of the first error display ES10 such as "error occurrence", the display of the first error display ES10'and the output of the first error sound are the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, and the speaker. It starts at each of the 180s. In addition, the payout number display 127, which has been hidden so far, starts displaying E7, which is an error code of the medal passage confirmation error. In the first image display device 157, the error list display EL1 whose display has been started as an error notification regarding the door opening error is continuously displayed, but the second error display using the error list display EL1 is the second. Display ES21 according to 1 display mode has been completed. Further, also in the second image display device 158, the same content error list display EL1', which was started to be displayed as an error notification regarding the door opening error, is continuously displayed, but the same content error list display EL1'was used. The display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second display of the same content error has been completed.

Eventually, the first image display device 157 starts displaying the fourth error display ES40 using the error list display EL1, and the second image display device 158 starts displaying the fourth error display ES40 using the same content error list display EL1'. The error display ES40'is started to be displayed. Further, the error code (E7) is continuously displayed on the payout number display 127. After that, in the first image display device 157, the instruction display IS10 and the second error release explanation display RS20 are alternately displayed, and in the second image display device 158, the same content instruction display IS10'and the second error release explanation display RS20 are displayed. In the speaker 180, the alternate output of the instruction notification sound and the second error cancellation explanation notification sound continues. Further, the error code (E7) is continuously displayed on the payout number display 127.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 63, the newly generated error was a medal passage confirmation error with an error code of E7, but the error code was E2 to E6 in a state where the door opening error was not cleared. When any of the errors of and E8 is detected, the error notification regarding the door opening error ends, and instead, the error notification based on the newly generated error is started. Again, the door open error is a simple error that can be cleared by closing the front door 102, while the E2 to E8 errors are complicated errors that involve the work of replenishing and removing medals. It is notified with priority over the door opening error. In other words, in the error notification, the error for which the error release explanation notification is performed is notified with priority over the error for which the error cancellation explanation notification is not performed.

In the description of FIGS. 53 to 63, the error notification using the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the payout number display 127, and the speaker 180 has been described, but the side lamp 144 is used. The error notification may be performed. For example, a color (a color other than white) indicating each error is displayed on the error list display EL1 or the error list display EL1'with the same contents, and in the case of the first error notification indicating that an error is detected, the side. The lamp 144 may be blinked in white, and the side lamp 144 may be blinked in a color indicating each error in the case of error notification for specifying each error.

Next, a modified example of error notification using the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158 will be described.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a modified example of error notification using the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of error notification following from FIG. 64. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a modified example of the error notification following from FIG. 65. FIG. 64 (a-2) is a diagram corresponding to the figure (a-1), and FIG. 64 (b-2) is a diagram corresponding to the figure (b-1). Further, FIG. 65 (a-2) is a diagram corresponding to the figure (a-1), and FIG. 65 (b-2) is a diagram corresponding to the figure (b-1). Further, FIG. 66 (a-2) is a diagram corresponding to the figure (a-1), and FIG. 66 (b-2) is a diagram corresponding to the figure (b-1).

In FIG. 64 (a-1), the first image display device 157 in which the display screen 1571 displays the background display for the effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left, and the display screen 1581 also faces diagonally downward to the left. A second image display device 158 on which the background display for the effect represented by the hatching is displayed is shown.

Here, the configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described. The control units of the slot machine 100 are roughly divided into a main control unit that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit that controls the main effect according to a command signal transmitted by the main control unit, and a first sub-control unit. It is composed of a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from one sub-control unit. A VDP (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit, and a ROM and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP via a bus. In the VRAM 518, the area of the first effect image display device 157 (hereinafter referred to as "first area") and the area of the second effect image display device 158 (hereinafter referred to as "second area") are distinguished. It is provided. The VDP reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit, expands the image data in the first area provided in the work area of the VRAM 518, and performs drawing processing. I do. When the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1571 is completed in the first area, the image is displayed on the first effect image display device 157. Further, the VDP reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit, expands the image data in the second area provided in the work area of the VRAM 518, and expands the image data. Perform drawing processing. When the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1581 is completed in the second area, the image is displayed on the second effect image display device 158. A plurality of drawing areas are prepared in both the first area and the second area.

FIG. 64 (a-2) shows a first drawing area 5181 in the first area and a first drawing area 5182 in the second area of the VRAM 518 included in the slot machine 100. In the second drawing area in the first area, which was not shown in FIG. 64 (a-2), the background for the effect shown by hatching diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 157 in the figure (a-1). Generation of the display image is complete. Further, in the second drawing area in the second area, which is also not shown in the figure (a-2), the effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 158 of the figure (a-1). The generation of the background display image for is completed. On the other hand, nothing is drawn in either the first drawing area 5181 in the first area or the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 64 (a-2).

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 64 (b-2), the entire display image of the first error display ES10 called "error occurrence" is generated, but the display image of the error list display EL1. Is generated only halfway. Therefore, the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1571 has not been completed yet. In addition, a monochromatic background image that serves as a background display for error notification has not been generated at all. From the above, the background display for the effect is still displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), and any other display is additionally displayed. Not.

In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 64 (b-2), the entire display image of the first error display ES10'with the same content as "error occurred" is generated, and the error list display with the same content is displayed. The display image of EL1'has also been generated. Therefore, the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1581 is completed. In this modification, in displaying the image, the background display image and the display image different from the background image such as the first same content error display ES10'and the same content error list display EL1' are handled separately. In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area, the monochromatic background image used as the background display for error notification is generated only halfway. As a result, on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), the background display is still the background display for the effect, but the first same content error display ES10'and the same. Content error list display EL1'is additionally displayed. In addition, the background display image and the display image different from the background image may be handled together. In this case, the generation of the display image of the entire display screen is not completed, and the additional display is performed. Will not be done. Alternatively, the display images of the first error display ES10'and the first error display ES10'and the display images of the error list display EL1'and the error list display EL1 are handled separately, for example, FIG. 64 (b-2). ), Only the first error display ES10 may be displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157.

At the stage of FIG. 64 (b-2), the first drawing area 5182 in the second area is more advanced in the generation of the display image than the first drawing area 5181 in the first area.

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 65 (a-2), the entire display image of the first error display ES10 called "error occurrence" is generated, and the display image of the error list display EL1 is also generated. Generation is complete. Therefore, the generation of the display image of the entire display screen 1571 is completed. On the other hand, in the first drawing area 5181 in the first area, the monochromatic background image used as the background display for error notification is generated only halfway. As a result, on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 65 (a-1), the background display is still the background display for the effect, but the first error display ES10 and the error list display EL1. Is displayed.

In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 65 (a-2), an error was generated only halfway in the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 64 (b-2). The generation of the monochromatic background image to be the background display for notification has also been completed, and the background display is also the background display for error notification on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 65 (a-1). It is a background image of a single color (here, one color of white).

Even at the stage of FIG. 65 (a-2), the first drawing area 5182 in the second area is more advanced in the generation of the display image than the first drawing area 5181 in the first area.

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 65 (b-2), an error was generated only halfway in the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 65 (a-2). The generation of the monochromatic background image to be the background display for notification has also been completed, and the background display is also the background display for error notification on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 65 (b-1). It is a background image of a single color (here, one color of white).

In the first drawing area 5181 in the first area shown in FIG. 66 (a-2), the display image of the first error display ES10 "error occurred" is erased, and in the error list display EL1, E1 and the door opening error occur. The display image of the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display of the square thick frame display surrounding the character display is generated halfway. As a result, the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 66 (a-1) remains the same as the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 65 (b-1). ..

In the first drawing area 5182 in the second area shown in FIG. 66 (a-2), the display image of the first error display ES10'with the same content "error occurred" is erased, and in the error list display EL1'with the same content, the display image is erased. The generation of the display image of the display ES21'by the first display mode of the second same content error display of the square thick frame display surrounding the character display of E1 and the door opening error has been completed. As a result, on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 66 (a-1), the first error display ES10'with the same content "error occurred" disappears, and the error display EL1'with the same content disappears. The display ES21'in the first display mode of the second same content error display of the square thick frame display surrounding the character display of E1 and the door opening error is displayed. In this modification, the data amount of the image data of the second error display expanded in the drawing area of the second area is the data of the image data of the second error display expanded in the drawing area of the first area. Less than the amount. Further, even when the entire display screen is viewed, the amount of image data displayed on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 is the amount of the image data displayed on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. It is less than the amount of data. As a result, drawing in the drawing area of the second area is completed earlier than drawing in the drawing area of the first area, and the display of the second error display is started in the first effect image display device 157. Before, the display of the second same content error display is started in the second effect image display device 158. That is, in FIG. 66 (a-1), the relationship between the display screen including the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display and the display screen including the display ES21'according to the first display mode of the second same content error display. However, the relationship between the display screen including the display ES22 according to the second display mode of the second error display and the display screen including the display ES22'according to the second display mode of the second same content error display is also the same.

FIG. 66 (b-2) shows the VRAM 518 immediately after the door opening error is resolved while the status display SS10 such as “door is open” is displayed. The VRAM 518 shows a second drawing area 5183 in the first area and a second drawing area 5184 in the second area. In the second drawing area 5183 in the first area, the generation of the background display image for the effect represented by the hatching diagonally downward to the left is completed only halfway, and the first image shown in FIG. 66 (b-1) is shown. On the display screen 1571 of the effect image display device 157, the status display SS10 such as "the door is open" and the display ES21 according to the first display mode of the second error display are still displayed.

On the other hand, in the second drawing area 5184 in the second area, the generation of the background display image for the effect represented by the hatching diagonally downward to the left is completed. Therefore, on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 shown in FIG. 66 (b-1), the display of the error notification is switched to the background display for effect represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left. In this modification, the amount of data of the background display image data for the effect developed in the drawing area of the second area is the data of the image data of the background display for the effect developed in the drawing area of the first area. Less than the amount. As a result, drawing in the drawing area of the second area is completed earlier than drawing in the drawing area of the first area, and the display of the second error display is completed in the first effect image display device 157. Before, the display of the second same content error display ends in the second effect image display device 158.

As described above, in this modification, the error notification on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 is started at an earlier timing than the error notification on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. To. In the past, even if an error was displayed on one display screen, the player might not notice it, but by displaying the error on a different display screen, the player may be aware that an error has occurred. You may be able to do it. In addition, by making the notification start time different for each display screen, it may be easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred. In particular, the display is started first on the display screen 1581 of the smaller second effect image display device 158, and then the display is started later on the display screen 1571 of the larger first effect image display device 157. Therefore, it is possible to give the impression that the small display is enlarged and displayed, and to realize a moving error display between different display screens. Moreover, the larger display makes it easier for the player to notice.

Further, the error notification on the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 ends earlier than the error notification on the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. That is, the display screen 1581 of the second effect image display device 158 may start the effect at an earlier timing than the display screen 1571 of the first effect image display device 157. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the small effect display is enlarged and displayed, and to realize a moving effect display between different display screens.

In the modification described above, the VRAM 518 is divided into a first area for the first effect image display device 157 and a second area for the second effect image display device 158, but the two are not separated. The display image may be generated in the same area (hereinafter referred to as "common drawing area"). Even in this case, in order to give the impression that the small display is enlarged and displayed, the display is started first on the display screen 1581 of the smaller second effect image display device 158. , The display start timing is controlled by the second sub-control unit side. Alternatively, the second effect image display device 158 displays the image generated in the common drawing area as it is, whereas the first effect image display device 157 enlarges the image generated in the common drawing area on the device side. If the display is made after that, the second effect image display device 158 starts the display at a timing earlier than that of the first effect image display device 157 because the enlargement processing is not performed.

Further, in the notification by the first effect image display device 157, the notification by the second effect image display device 158, and the notification by the speaker 180, the notification by the speaker 180 may be started earliest. The error sound is a notification that is noticed even if you are looking away (even if you are not looking at the display screen), and it is a notification that is easily noticed by the clerk of the game store, so you may start it first.

Further, in the above description, the slot machine 100 has been taken as an example, but the error notification described above can also be applied to a pachinko machine. The pachinko machine also has a main body and a front frame door, and is equipped with a first effect image display device (main liquid crystal display device) on the main body side and a second effect image display device (sub liquid crystal display device) on the front frame door. Or, there is one provided with both a first effect image display device and a second effect image display device on the main body side. It also has a speaker and a frame lamp. Further, instead of the payout number display device 127, a first special symbol display device or a second special symbol display device composed of a 7-segment display device or the like can be used as the notification means. Even in a pachinko machine, when the front frame door is opened, a door opening error occurs, and a second error display, a second error display having the same content, and a second error sound can be applied. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine, there is a payout device that pays out the game balls stored in the ball tank, and errors such as insufficient payout error, excess payout error, and illegal payout error of the game ball. There is. Furthermore, there are magnetic (magnet) errors, impact errors, large winning opening winning excess errors, large winning opening emission excess errors, and the like. A third error display, a fourth error display, a third same content error display, a fourth same content error display, a third error sound, and a fourth error sound can be applied to these errors.

In the above description,
A game table provided with "notifying means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display device 127, a side lamp 144, a speaker 180].
When an error is detected, the notification means includes a first error notification [for example, a first error display ES10 of "error occurrence", a first error display ES10'of "error occurrence", "error occurrence", and the like. It is a means to execute the first error sound by voice].
The first error notification is a notification indicating that an error has been detected.
The first error notification is a notification in which it is not possible to specify what kind of error the detected error is.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game console, when a fraudster causes an error while trying to commit a fraudulent act on the game console, the fraudster is anxious by performing the first error notification in which the error name and the type of error are not specified. , May be able to discourage the execution of fraudulent activity. In addition, if an error occurs during the game, it is sufficient for the player to know that some error has occurred in order to call the game clerk, so the player is asked to call the game clerk with the minimum necessary information. You may be able to.

also,
"The notification means is a means for executing the first error notification when a second error [for example, a door opening error] is detected.
The first error notification is a notification in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the second error.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means is a means for executing the first error notification even when a third error [for example, a hopper empty error] is detected.
The first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means performs the first error notification when the second error is detected, and then displays the second error notification [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door opening error. Display ES21 by the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by a thick square frame, display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display "door error", E1 and the door in the error list display EL1'with the same contents. Display ES21'by the first display mode of the second same content error display in which the character display of the opening error is surrounded by a thick square frame, display ES22'by the second display mode of the second same content error display called "door error", It is a means to execute a second error sound by voice such as "door opening error"].
When the third error is detected, the notification means executes the first error notification and then displays the characters of the third error notification [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the hopper empty error]. 3rd error display ES30 surrounded by a thick frame, E2 in the same content error list display EL1'and the character display of the hopper empty error surrounded by a thick square frame 3rd same content error display ES30', "Hopper empty error" 3rd error sound by voice], which is a means to execute.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error.
The third error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the third error.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

When a game clerk called by a player by the first error notification rushes to the game table, the content of the error can be grasped and dealt with by the second error notification and the third error notification. In some cases.

also,
"The notification means is a means including at least a display means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158].
The first error notification [for example, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence", the first error display ES10'with the same content "error occurrence", and the first error sound by voice such as "error occurrence"] is detected. It is a notification by a display that cannot be specified that the error is the second error.
The first error notification is a notification by a display in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the third error [for example, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" and the first error "error occurrence". Content error display ES10'],
The second error notification is a notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, the character display of E1 in the error list display EL1 and the door opening error is displayed in a thick square frame. Display ES21 by the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by, display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display "door error", E1 in the error list display EL1'with the same contents, and the character of the door open error. The display is ES21'by the first display mode of the second same content error display surrounded by a thick square frame, and the display ES22'] by the second display mode of the second same content error display called "door error".
The third error notification is a notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, the character display of E2 in the error list display EL1 and the hopper empty error is displayed in a thick square frame. The third error display ES30 surrounded by, the same content error list display EL1', the character display of the hopper empty error is surrounded by a thick square frame, and the third same content error display ES30'].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means is a means including at least one of a sound generating means [for example, a speaker 180] and a light emitting means [for example, a side lamp 144].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"Main body [for example, main body 101] and
A door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable.
Equipped with
The main body is provided with a payout device [for example, a medal discharge device] for paying out the stored game medium.
The second error is an error in which the door portion is opened [for example, a door opening error].
The third error is an error [for example, a hopper empty error] in which the stored game medium is exhausted and the payout device cannot pay out the game medium.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 52].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game table provided with "notifying means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display device 127, a side lamp 144, a speaker 180].
When the second error [for example, door opening error] is detected, the notification means displays the characters of the second error notification [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the door opening error] in a thick square frame. Display ES21 by the first display mode of the enclosed second error display, display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display "door error", E1 in the error list display EL1'with the same contents, and character display of the door open error. ES21'in the first display mode of the second same content error display surrounded by a thick square frame, ES22'display in the second display mode of the second same content error display called "door error", "door open error" It is a means to execute the second error sound by voice such as
When the third error [for example, hopper empty error] is detected, the notification means displays the characters of the third error notification [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the hopper empty error] in a thick square frame. Enclosed 3rd error display ES30, E2 in the same content error list display EL1'and hopper empty error character display surrounded by a thick square frame 3rd same content error display ES30', by voice such as "hopper empty error" It is a means to execute the third error sound].
The notification means is a means that does not execute the second error notification when the second error is detected during the execution of the third error notification [for example, an example described with reference to FIG. 62]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the clerk of the game store may be able to concentrate on dealing with the third error that occurred earlier.

also,
"The notification means is a means for executing the third error notification when the third error is detected during the execution of the second error notification [for example, an example described with reference to FIG. 63]. Note],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, in the second error and the third error, the third error has priority and is notified. In other words, of the second error and the third error, the third error has a higher priority.

also,
"Equipped with signal output means [for example, external centralized terminal board],
The signal output means is a means for outputting a signal indicating that the second error is detected to the outside when the second error is detected.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a clerk at a game store may be able to notice the occurrence of the second error when the fraudster is committing a fraudulent act without being aware of the occurrence of the second error. ..

also,
"When the second error is detected, the notification means first notifies the error prior to the second error notification [for example, the first error display ES10" error occurrence "," error occurrence "". It is a means to execute the first error display ES10'with the same content, and the first error sound by voice such as "error occurrence"].
The notification means is a means for executing the first error notification before the third error notification even when the third error is detected.
The first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The second error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the second error.
The third error notification is a notification that can identify that the detected error is the third error.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means is a means including at least a display means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158].
The first error notification is a notification by a display in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the second error [for example, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" and the first error "error occurrence". Content error display ES10'],
The first error notification is a notification by a display in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the third error [for example, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" and the first error "error occurrence". Content error display ES10'],
The second error notification is a notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, the character display of E1 in the error list display EL1 and the door opening error is displayed in a thick square frame. Display ES21 by the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by, display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display "door error", E1 in the error list display EL1'with the same contents, and the character of the door open error. The display is ES21'by the first display mode of the second same content error display surrounded by a thick square frame, and the display ES22'] by the second display mode of the second same content error display called "door error".
The third error notification is a notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, the character display of E2 in the error list display EL1 and the hopper empty error is displayed in a thick square frame. The third error display ES30 surrounded by, the same content error list display EL1', the character display of the hopper empty error is surrounded by a thick square frame, and the third same content error display ES30'].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means is a means including at least one of a sound generating means [for example, a speaker 180] and a light emitting means [for example, a side lamp 144].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"Main body [for example, main body 101] and
A door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable.
Equipped with
The main body is provided with a payout device [for example, a medal discharge device] for paying out the stored game medium.
The second error is an error in which the door portion is opened [for example, a door opening error].
The third error is an error [for example, a hopper empty error] in which the stored game medium is exhausted and the payout device cannot pay out the game medium.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 52].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

In the above description,
A game table provided with "notifying means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158, a payout number display device 127, a side lamp 144, a speaker 180].
When the second error [for example, door opening error] is detected, the notification means displays the characters of the second error notification [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the door opening error] in a thick square frame. Display ES21 by the first display mode of the enclosed second error display, display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display "door error", E1 in the error list display EL1'with the same contents, and character display of the door open error. ES21'in the first display mode of the second same content error display surrounded by a thick square frame, ES22'display in the second display mode of the second same content error display called "door error", "door open error" It is a means to make a second error sound by voice such as
In the second error notification, notification by the first notification mode indicating that the detected error is the second error [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door opening error are displayed in a square. Display by the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by a thick frame ES21, E1 in the same content error list display EL1'and the character display of the door opening error is surrounded by a thick square frame. ES21'] according to the first display mode of the above, and notification by the second notification mode indicating that the detected error is the second error [for example, the second display of the second error display of "door error". Display ES22 according to the mode, display ES22'] by the second display mode of the second display of the same content error "door error" is included.
A game table featuring that.

In the past, there was a case where the player did not notice even if the error notification was performed in one notification mode, but according to this game table, the error occurred in the player by performing the error notification in a different notification mode. You may be able to notice that.

also,
"The notification means is a means for executing the notification according to the second notification mode even during the execution of the notification according to the first notification mode [for example, FIG. 54 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means [for example, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, the speaker 180] is a game table in which the second error occurs after the execution of the second error notification is started. Execution of the status notification [for example, the status display SS10 such as "door is open", the same content status display SS10'such as "door is open", and the status notification sound such as "door is open"]. A way to get started,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to inform a player or a clerk of a game store what kind of state the game table is in due to the occurrence of the second error due to the state notification. In particular, for those who are not familiar with the occurrence of the second error, this status notification makes it easy to understand the second error that has occurred. In addition, for a person who has committed a fraudulent act that causes the second error, the surrounding players will be informed of the state of the game table by this status notification, and which one It is possible that such fraudulent activity has been committed, and it may be possible to discourage further fraudulent activity.

also,
"The notification means is a means for executing notification according to the first notification mode even during execution of the state notification [for example, FIG. 54 (b)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means is a means for alternately executing the notification by the second notification mode and the state notification [for example, the first image display device 157 and the second image display device 158 shown in FIG. 55].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means displays the characters of the third error notification [for example, E2 in the error list display EL1 and the hopper empty error] in a thick square frame when a third error [for example, a hopper empty error] is detected. 3rd error display ES30 surrounded by, 3rd error display ES30'with the same content error list display EL1'E2 in E2 and hopper empty error character display surrounded by a thick square frame, voice such as "hopper empty error" It is a means to execute the third error sound by
When the second error is detected, the notification means first notifies the error prior to the second error notification [for example, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence", "error occurrence". It is a means to execute the first error display ES10'with the same content, the first error sound by voice such as "error occurrence"].
The notification means is a means for executing the first error notification before the third error notification even when the third error is detected.
The first error notification is a notification in which it is impossible to determine whether the detected error is the second error or the third error.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

note that,
"The notification means is an instruction notification indicating an instruction to the player after the start of execution of the third error notification [for example, the instruction display IS10" call a clerk ", the same as" call a clerk ". It is a means to start the execution of the content instruction display IS10', the instruction notification sound such as "Please call the clerk"].
The notification means is a means for executing the third error notification even while the instruction notification is being executed [for example, FIG. 57 (a)].
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

also,
"The notification means is an explanatory notification explaining an error cancellation method after the start of execution of the third error notification [for example, the first error cancellation explanation display RS10" Please replenish medals and press the reset switch ". , "Replenish medals and press the reset switch", the first error release explanation display RS10', "Replenish the medals and press the reset switch", etc. It ’s a way to start execution,
The notification means is a means for executing the third error notification even during the execution of the explanatory notification [for example, FIG. 57 (b)].
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

also,
"The notification means is a means for alternately executing the instruction notification and the explanation notification [for example, the first image display device 157, the second image display device 158, and the speaker 180 shown in FIG. 58].
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

also,
"The instruction notification is a notification instructing to call a clerk of a game store [for example, an instruction display IS10 saying" call a clerk ", an instruction display IS10'same content saying" call a clerk "," please call a clerk. "Instruction notification sound],
The explanation notification is a notification explaining the error release operation to the clerk [For example, the first error release explanation display RS10 "Please replenish the medals and press the reset switch", "Replenish the medals and press the reset switch". 1st error release explanation display RS10', "Please replenish the medal and press the reset switch", 1st error release explanation notification sound such as "Please replenish the medal", "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch" 2 Error release explanation display RS20, 2nd error release explanation display RS20', "Please remove the medal and press the reset switch", 2nd error release explanation notification sound such as "Remove the medal and press the reset switch" ],
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

also,
"The notification means is a means including at least a display means [for example, a first image display device 157, a second image display device 158].
The first error notification is a notification by a display in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the second error [for example, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" and the first error "error occurrence". Content error display ES10'],
The first error notification is a notification by a display in which it is not possible to specify that the detected error is the third error [for example, the first error display ES10 "error occurrence" and the first error "error occurrence". Content error display ES10'],
The notification by the first notification mode is a notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, the character display of E1 in the error list display EL1 and the door opening error is displayed in a square. Display by the first display mode of the second error display surrounded by a thick frame ES21, E1 in the same content error list display EL1'and the character display of the door opening error is the second same content error display surrounded by a thick square frame. Display ES21'] according to the first display mode.
The notification by the second notification mode is a notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the second error [for example, the display ES22 by the second display mode of the second error display of "door error". , Display ES22'] by the second display mode of the second same content error display called "door error".
The third error notification is a notification by a display that can identify that the detected error is the third error [for example, the character display of E2 in the error list display EL1 and the hopper empty error is displayed in a thick square frame. The third error display ES30 surrounded by, the same content error list display EL1', the character display of the hopper empty error is surrounded by a thick square frame, and the third same content error display ES30'].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The notification means is a means including at least one of a sound generating means [for example, a speaker 180] and a light emitting means [for example, a side lamp 144].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"Main body [for example, main body 101] and
A door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable.
Equipped with
The main body is provided with a payout device [for example, a medal discharge device] for paying out the stored game medium.
The second error is an error in which the door portion is opened [for example, a door opening error].
The third error is an error [for example, a hopper empty error] in which the stored game medium is exhausted and the payout device cannot pay out the game medium.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 52].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] and
A second display means [for example, a second image display device 158] and
It is a game table equipped with
When a second error [for example, a door open error] is detected, the second error display [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door open error] are displayed in a square in the first display means. Before the display of the second error display in the first display mode enclosed in the thick frame ES21] starts, the error display having the same content as the second error display in the second display means (hereinafter, """Same content error display") [For example, according to the first display mode of the second same content error display in which the character display of E1 and the door open error in the same content error list display EL1'is surrounded by a thick square frame. Display ES21'] starts [for example, FIG. 66 (a-1)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

In the past, there was a case where the player did not notice even if the error notification was performed by one display means, but according to this game table, the error occurred in the player by performing the error notification by different display means. You may be able to notice that. Further, by making the notification start time different for each display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that an error has occurred.

also,
"Before the display of the second error display ends in the first display means, the display of the same content error display ends in the second display means [for example, FIG. 66 (b-1)]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"Main body [for example, main body 101] and
A door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable.
Equipped with
The second display means is a means provided on the door portion.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Even when the door portion is open, the same content error display is displayed on the second display means, and the same content error display can be seen from the lateral direction. Therefore, when an unauthorized person opens the door illegally, the clerk of the game store or the surveillance camera may notice that the door has been opened illegally from a lateral viewpoint with respect to the game table.

also,
"The first display means is a means provided on the main body.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The second error display in the first display means is larger than the same content error display in the second display means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

Since the second error display by the later display means (the first display means) is larger at the start time of the notification, the player may be more aware that the error has occurred. ..

also,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is an image generated in the first drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [for example, VRAM 518]. Is a means for displaying the second error display using the above.
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is an image generated in the second drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [for example, VRAM 518]. Is a means for displaying the same content error display using the above.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

note that,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is generated in the first drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [for example, VRAM 518]. It is a means for displaying the image of the second error display.
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is generated in the second drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [for example, VRAM 518]. It is a means for displaying the image of the same content error display.
A game table featuring that. "
May be, and even more
"The image of the second error display generated in the first drawing area is an image generated by expanding the first image data into the VRAM.
The image of the same content error display generated in the second drawing area is an image generated by expanding the second image data into the VRAM.
The second image data is image data having a smaller amount of data than the first image data.
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

Since the amount of the second image data is small, the generation to the second drawing area is completed earlier, and the second display means starts displaying the same content error display at an earlier timing. It will be.

also,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is a means for displaying the second error display using an image generated in the common drawing area of the VRAM.
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is a means for displaying the same content error display using an image generated in the common drawing area.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 52].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] having the first display screen [for example, the display screen 1571] and the like.
A second display means [eg, second image display device 158] having a second display screen [eg, display screen 1581], and
It is a game table equipped with
When a second error [for example, a door open error] is detected, the first display means displays a second error on the first display screen [for example, a second error display of "door error". Is a means for displaying the display ES22] according to the second display mode of the above.
When the second error is detected, the second display means displays an error with the same content as the second error display on the second display screen (hereinafter, referred to as "same content error display". ) [For example, display ES22'in the second display mode of the second same content error display called "door error"] is a means for displaying.
The distance from the end of the first display screen to the second error display displayed on the first display screen is displayed on the second display screen from the end of the second display screen. The distance to the error display of the same content is different [for example, the magnitude relation of the numbers indicated by the arrows in FIG. 54 (a)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

In the past, there was a case where the player did not notice even if the error notification was performed by one display means, but according to this game table, the error occurred in the player by performing the error notification by different display means. You may be able to notice that. Further, by making the distance from the edge of the display screen to the second error display different for each display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the error has occurred.

note that,
"The main control means to control the progress of the game,
A sub-control means that receives a command transmitted from the main control means and controls based on the command, and a sub-control means.
A third display means [for example, payout number display 127] that displays an error display when a third error is detected.
Equipped with
The first display means is a means controlled by the sub-control means.
The second display means is a means controlled by the sub-control means.
The third display means is a means controlled by the main control means.
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

Further, "The third display means is a means for displaying an error display faster than the first display means and the second display means.
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

also,
"The third display means is a means for not displaying the error display when the second error is detected.
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

also,
"The first display screen [for example, display screen 1571] is a rectangular display screen.
The second display screen [for example, display screen 1581] is a rectangular display screen.
The horizontal length of the same content error display displayed on the second display screen with respect to the horizontal length of the second display screen [for example, "6" shown in FIG. 54 (a)] [for example. , The ratio [eg, 3/6] of "3" shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the lateral length of the first display screen [eg, "25" shown in FIG. 54 (a)]. It is larger than the ratio [for example, 10/25] of the lateral length [for example, “10” shown in FIG. 54 (a)] of the second error display displayed on the first display screen.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By making the display ratio of the error display in the horizontal direction different between the two display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the error has occurred.

also,
"The vertical length of the second error display displayed on the first display screen with respect to the vertical length of the first display screen [for example," 14 "shown in FIG. 54 (a)". The ratio [for example, 3/14] of [for example, “3” shown in FIG. 54 (a)] is the vertical length of the second display screen [for example, “11” shown in FIG. 54 (a). ] In the vertical length [for example, “0.9” shown in FIG. 54 (a)] of the same content error display displayed on the second display screen [for example, 0.9 / 11]. Greater than
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By making the display ratio of the error display in the vertical direction different between the two display means, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the error has occurred.

also,
"The first display screen has a horizontal length [for example," 25 "shown in FIG. 54 (a)] rather than a vertical length [for example, "14" shown in FIG. 54 (a)]. It ’s a long display screen,
The second display screen has a longer vertical length [for example, "11" shown in FIG. 54 (a)] than a horizontal length [for example, "6" shown in FIG. 54 (a)]. The display screen,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

By using the horizontally long first display screen and the vertically long second display screen, the appearance of the error display displayed on each display screen is different, and it is easier for the player to notice that the error has occurred. May be possible.

also,
"When the second error is detected, the second error display [for example, E1 in the error list display EL1 and the character display of the door opening error are surrounded by a thick square frame on the first display screen. However, before the display of the second error display according to the first display mode [ES21] starts, the E1 in the same content error display [for example, the same content error list display EL1'and the door are opened on the second display screen. Display ES21'] by the first display mode of the second same content error display in which the error character display is surrounded by a thick square frame starts to be displayed [for example, FIG. 66 (a-1)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"Before the display of the second error display ends on the first display screen, the display of the same content error display ends on the second display screen [for example, FIG. 66 (b-1)]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"Main body [for example, main body 101] and
A door portion [for example, a front door 102] attached to the main body portion so as to be openable and closable.
Equipped with
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is a means provided on the door portion.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is a means provided in the main body portion.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The second error display on the first display screen is larger than the same content error display on the second display screen.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is an image generated in the first drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [for example, VRAM 518]. Is a means for displaying the second error display using the above.
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is an image generated in the second drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [for example, VRAM 518]. Is a means for displaying the same content error display using the above.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

note that,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is generated in the first drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5181 in the first area] of the VRAM [for example, VRAM 518]. It is a means for displaying the image of the second error display.
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is generated in the second drawing area [for example, the first drawing area 5182 in the second area] of the VRAM [for example, VRAM 518]. It is a means for displaying the image of the same content error display.
A game table featuring that. "
May be, and even more
"The image of the second error display generated in the first drawing area is an image generated by expanding the first image data into the VRAM.
The image of the same content error display generated in the second drawing area is an image generated by expanding the second image data into the VRAM.
The second image data is image data having a smaller amount of data than the first image data.
A game table featuring that. "
May be.

Since the amount of the second image data is small, the generation to the second drawing area is completed earlier, and the second display means starts displaying the same content error display at an earlier timing. It will be.

also,
"The first display means [for example, the first image display device 157] is a means for displaying the second error display using an image generated in the common drawing area of the VRAM.
The second display means [for example, the second image display device 158] is a means for displaying the same content error display using an image generated in the common drawing area.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 52].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The identification prefixes such as "first-", "second-", "third-", etc. described above may be replaced as appropriate. For example, "third ~" may be replaced with "fourth ~".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are merely a list of the most suitable actions and effects, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are limited to those described here. is not it. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendices, etc. are applied to other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a spinning machine such as a slot machine 100 and a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 67 to 83. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 67 to 83 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 67 to 83, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 67 to 67 to 83 are shown. In the description using FIG. 83, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 67 to 83 are given priority.

FIG. 67 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67 starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. , If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out. The payout of this game medium may be referred to as profit. In addition, what facilitates the acquisition of this profit may be referred to as a privilege.

The slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably mounted on the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function so that only a clerk at a game store can open the front door 102.

Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

An appropriate number of each symbol is printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. From the player's point of view, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

More specifically with reference to FIG. 68, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is placed on the upper design of the left reel and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure). The displayed symbol is displayed on the left reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is displayed on the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol is displayed on the upper part of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle part of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed on the middle part of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 8 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 3 shown in the figure) is the symbol on the upper part of the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle part of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the figure) is on the right. The symbols displayed in the middle reel symbol and the lower part of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure) are called the lower right reel symbols, respectively, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is passed through the symbol display window 113 to each reel 110 to. A total of nine are displayed on the 112, three in the vertical direction. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. The backlight is configured so that each symbol can be shielded and the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 70) is provided. A light-shielding piece (not shown) having a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of 730). The symbol position of the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the effective line.

The effective line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating an effective line 114. The valid line is a line (a line on which the winning determination is made) for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described with reference to FIG. 75 is displayed, and the internal winning combination is used for this effective line. When the symbol corresponding to is stopped, it is judged as a prize. Here, the line defines an area for one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 in the area in the display window 113. A line other than the valid line for which the winning judgment is not made is referred to as an invalid line.

In FIG. 68, a middle line L1 composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right descending line L2 composed of a right reel lower symbol. Left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbol and right reel upper symbol, right-up line L3, left reel upper symbol, middle reel upper symbol, right reel upper symbol, upper line L4, left reel lower symbol, Five lines of the lower line L5 composed of the middle reel lower symbol and the right reel lower symbol are shown. These lines are an example, and an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, for example, a line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. Anything is fine. Of the lines shown in FIG. 68, the upper line L4 is used as an effective line in this embodiment. The effective line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a dedicated machine for betting three medals, and no line is valid when the number of inserted medals is less than three, and line L4 is valid when three medals are bet. (Becomes used as a valid line). When the line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of effective lines is not limited to one line. For example, the three lines of the middle line L1, the downward-sloping line L2, and the upward-sloping line L3 may be used as effective lines, or the number of effective lines corresponding to the number of bets may be used.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the player is in a special gaming state described later. be. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. When the re-game lamp 122 wins a re-game combination (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, the re-game is replayable (no medal is required). It is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, one sheet is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a push order. Further, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 140, and a key is inserted into the key hole 140, and the inserted key is unlocked by turning it to the right and locked by turning it to the left. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor (not shown) for detecting that the front door 102 has been opened. This open sensor detects that the front door 102 has opened by detecting an opening / closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 opens.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player in the production. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157. In this case, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 69) to the outside. The left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102 and the right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 69) to the outside. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side). .. Although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7 segments) may be used. A display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may have a curved surface.

It should be noted that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, as long as it emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode fluorescent lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, a lamp that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 69 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door open. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 A reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below. A sub-control board storage case 220 containing a sub-control board is disposed on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side facing the main control board storage case 210. The sub-control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since the first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game store) should open the front door 102. However, a person (for example, a player) who cannot unlock the front door 102 cannot perform the operation. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate the first selection switch 190. The details of the first selection switch 190 will be described later. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply having a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reel unit 700. The device 252 is arranged, and the power switch 244 is arranged on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (which controls the effect device 160) are placed on the upper part of the design display window 113. (Not shown), an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the symbol display window 113, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

Next, the structure of the reel unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the reel unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 4, the reel unit 700 includes a reel case 702 made of a box-shaped metal plate. A connector 703 for connecting the power supply, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 is provided on the upper portion of the reel case 702. Further, three reels 110 to 112 are housed in the reel case 702. These reels 110 to 112 are attached to a motor 720 for rotationally driving the reels 110 to 112. The motor 720, the index sensor 730 for detecting the rotational position of the reels 110 to 112, and the backlight module 740 for irradiating light from the back surface to the front surface of the strip-shaped member 710 of the reels 110 to 112 are mounted. It is attached to the base 732.

FIG. 71 (a) is a perspective view showing the structure of the backlight module 740, and FIG. 71 (b) is a front view of the backlight module 740.

The backlight module 740 is composed of a reflector 742 and a lighting board 744 that is detachably attached to the back surface of the reflector 742. The reflector 742 is formed with three openings BK1 to BK3 extending from the front surface side to the back surface side side by side in the vertical direction. Further, on the lighting board 744, two LEDs 745 are arranged at positions corresponding to the openings BK1 to BK3.

The openings BK1 to BK3 and LED745 are provided at positions corresponding to the symbol positions (positions of Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 2) for stop display on the display window 113 in the attached state. As described above, by providing the LED 745 in each of the openings BK1 to BK3, it is configured so as not to interfere with the light emitted to other positions when irradiating the light. As a result, it is possible to irradiate each of the positions Nos. 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 2 with light. For example, by turning on all the LEDs 745, it is possible to illuminate all the symbols visible to the player from behind. Further, by turning on a part of the symbols, some of the symbols visible to the player can be illuminated from behind. The number and positions of openings and LEDs are not limited to this configuration.

Subsequently, the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 69 will be described in detail. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the first selection switch 190 and the like shown in FIG. 69.

FIG. 72 (a) is an enlarged view of the first selection switch 190. The first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 72 (a) has a circular rotating portion 190a having 16 contacts and is rotatably configured, and is formed so as to project outward with the rotating portion 190a as a base end. It has an indicator unit 190b. Further, around the first selection switch 190, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a. The first selection switch 190 is an operating means for selecting one number from the 16 numbers.

These 16 numbers are treated as numerical values (setting values) representing the settings. That is, the first selection switch 190 is configured to be able to output the numerical information pointed to by the indicator unit 190b to the outside as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When "B" is pointed out, it means that the numerical value of "B" in hexadecimal is selected, and the information of the numerical value can be output as a detection signal (0b1011) of 4 bits in binary. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 74), which will be described later, inputs the detection signal to input the numerical value selected by the first selection switch 190 (any of the hexadecimal numbers 0 to F). The configuration is such that it can be detected, and the first sub-control unit 400 handles the numerical value pointed to by the instruction unit 190b as the selected set value.

In addition, instead of the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 72 (a), for example, the rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. 72 (b) may be applied, or the slide as shown in FIG. Switch 192 may be applied.

The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 72B has 16 contacts, has a ring-shaped rotating portion 191a configured to be rotatable, and has a notched window 191b formed in the rotating portion 191a. .. Further, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers 0 to F) are applied to the bottom of the rotating portion 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 191a.

In this rotary switch 191, a numerical value that can be seen from the notch window 191b is selected, and the information of the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the numerical value visible from the notch portion 191b is "F", it means that the hexadecimal F numerical value is selected, and the information of the numerical value is binary 4 bits. It can be output as a detection signal (0b1111) of. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 74), which will be described later, inputs this detection signal to select a numerical value (in this example, a hexadecimal number 0 to 0) that can be seen from the notch portion 191b of the rotary switch 191. It is configured to be able to detect any of the numerical values of F).

The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 72 (c) has a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. Further, above the slide switch 192, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers 0 to F) are applied corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

In this slide switch 192, a numerical value at which the slide portion 192b is located is selected, and the information of the numerical value can be output to the outside as a detection signal. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), when the slide portion 192b is located at the position of the numerical value "0", it means that the hexadecimal number 0 is selected, and the information of the numerical value is the binary number. It can be output as a 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, by inputting this detection signal, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 74), which will be described later, receives the selected numerical value (a numerical value of 0 to F in hexadecimal) in which the slide unit 192b of the slide switch 192 is located. It is configured to be able to detect any).

Since the first selection switch 190 described above with reference to FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c) is a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it can be operated even when it is not energized. Even when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the selected numerical value (set value) can be retained. Therefore, once the selection is made, the selected numerical value can be retained even when the power is turned off, and it is easy to set the set value intended by the game store, for example. Further, since the numerical value (display means) that can confirm the selected numerical value is provided, it is easy to confirm the set value and it is highly convenient.

FIG. 72 (d) is an enlarged view of the second selection switch 194. The second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 72 (d) includes a left button 167, a right button 168, and a second chance button 166 that functions as a confirmation button, as shown in FIG. 67. While the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 72 (a) is an operating means provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player, the second selection switch 194 can be operated by the player. It is an operating means provided at a position where it can be. That is, the second selection switch 194 is a switch that can be operated by the player, and for example, by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, a numerical value (setting value) representing a setting can be selected, and the second selection switch 194 can be selected. By pressing the chance button 166, the selected set value is confirmed. Alternatively, the set value can be selected by pressing the left button 167 and the right button 168, and the selected set value is confirmed after a predetermined time has elapsed without pressing the second chance button 166. May be good.

The second selection switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 is operated. Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 74), which will be described later, detects whether the second chance button 166, the left button 167, or the right button 168 is operated by inputting this detection signal. It is a configuration that can be done.

Instead of the second selection switch 194 shown in FIG. 72 (d), for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (e), a cross key having an up / down / left / right button and a confirmation button in addition to the second chance button 166. A 195 may be provided, and the cross key 195 may be applied as the second selection switch 194. Further, two types of operating means may be provided, and one of the operating means may also serve as a chance button, or only one of the operating means may be the second selection switch 194.

Since the second selection switch 194 is not a mechanical (mechanical) switch, it cannot operate in a state where it is not energized, and cannot hold the selected numerical value (set value) by itself. Therefore, it is necessary to separately provide a storage means for storing the set value. Although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67 is configured not to back up the numerical value selected by the second selection switch 194, it may be configured to back up.

FIG. 72 (f) is a diagram comparing the sizes of the second chance button 166 and the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 72 (f) also shows the left button 167 and the right button 168. The first chance button 165 is about three times as large as the second chance button 166.

In addition, on condition that the second chance button 166 or the first chance button 165 is operated, a cut-in display is performed, one of the chance buttons is used for a continuous hitting effect, and the other chance button is used as a hidden button. You may. Here, the hidden button does not suggest or promote the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation suggestion display or the operation promotion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the built-in effect lamp does not illuminate. At least one or both), but when the operating means is operated, some kind of effect is performed.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of selection of set values using the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67, the setting values that can be selected by the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 are the sounds output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effect, error). It is the value of the volume (volume) of (sound, etc.). As described above, the first selection switch 190 is an operation means provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player, and is a switch used by the clerk of the game store to select a set value. Further, only the first selection switch 190 of the first selection switch 190 and the second selection switch 194 can be selected to set the slot machine 100 to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode (normal mode). Can also be done. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67, the power saving mode is set only when the demonstration effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the demonstration will be abbreviated as a demo. The demo effect is an effect that is started when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in a state where the game is not restarted after the end of one game. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67 is set to the power saving mode when the demonstration effect is started in a state where the setting to the power saving mode is selected.

When the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode, the animation (demo animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is played in a dark state, so that the power consumption of the effect image display device 157 is suppressed and power is saved. .. Further, the power consumption of these light emitting means can be suppressed by turning off the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 shown in FIG. 72 built in the first chance button 165. Power is saved. When these light emitting means are turned off, the power consumption becomes 0, and the power saving effect of these light emitting means is higher than the power saving effect of the effect image display device 157.

Further, when the first selection switch 190 is operated, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In the volume selection using the first selection switch 190, one volume level is selected from the seven volume levels. In the non-power saving mode, mute can also be selected.

FIG. 73 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “0” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The first volume selection icon SI1 displays seven levels of volume level selection values and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). On the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 73 (A), the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 0 (0/7) and the character "silence" is displayed. In addition, none of them are lit in the 7-step horizontal level display. When the mute is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes completely inaudible.

FIG. 73 (B) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “1” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 73B displays the characters “volume 1/7” indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 1. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost 1st step level is lit in the first color (for example, yellow).

FIG. 73 (C) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is aligned with “7” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

On the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 73 (C), the characters "volume 7/7" indicating that the selection value of the seven-step volume level is 7 are displayed. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the first color (for example, yellow). When the volume level of the seventh stage is selected by the first selection switch 190, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 becomes the maximum volume.

FIG. 73 (D) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “8” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

The first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 73 (D) displays characters indicating that the volume selection value is the exhibition volume. This exhibition volume is a volume suitable for giving a presentation of the slot machine 100 at an exhibition or the like, and is, for example, a volume between the volume level of the fourth stage and the volume level of the fifth stage. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the second color (for example, red). In addition, instead of the exhibition volume, it may be possible to select a special volume that cannot be selected by the second selection switch 194 and can be selected only by the first selection switch 190. For example, it may be possible to select a step tone in which the volume is increased by one step every time a predetermined time elapses.

The first volume selection icon SI1 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

FIG. 73A is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “9” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

The second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 73 (a). The background color of the second volume selection icon SI2 is different from the background color of the first volume selection icon SI1. In addition, the second volume selection icon SI2 displays the characters "power saving mode", seven levels of volume level selection values, and seven levels of horizontal level display (indicator display). On the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 73 (a), the characters “power saving mode” and the characters “volume 7/7” indicating that the selection value of the 7-step volume level is 7 are displayed. There is. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, all the levels from the 1st step to the 7th step are lit in the third color (for example, blue).

FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the indicator unit 190 b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “F” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

On the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 73 (b), the characters "power saving mode" and the characters "volume 1/7" indicating that the selection value of the 7-step volume level is 1 are displayed. There is. Further, in the 7-step horizontal level display, only the leftmost first-step level is lit in the third color (for example, blue).

The second volume selection icon SI2 displayed on the effect image display device 157 also disappears if the first selection switch 190 is not operated for a predetermined time.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67, when the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is aligned with any of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 72 (a), the slot machine 100 is set. It is selected to set to power saving mode. Even if the power saving mode is selected, the slot machine 100 is not set to the power saving mode, and as described above, the slot machine 100 must be in the demo state to be set to the power saving mode. It becomes a condition. On the other hand, when the indicator unit 190b is aligned with any of "0" to "8" shown in FIG. 72 (a), it is selected to set the slot machine 100 to the non-power saving mode. If it is selected to set to non-power saving mode, it will not be set to power saving mode even in the demo state. Further, in the state where the game is being performed, the slot machine 100 is set to the non-power saving mode (normal mode).

The volume output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 is the same regardless of whether the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode or the non-power saving mode. Therefore, the volume output by the selection value selected in FIG. 73 (B) and the volume output by the selection value selected in FIG. 73 (b) are the same, and are selected in FIG. 73 (C). The volume output by the selected value and the volume output by the selected value selected in FIG. 73A are also the same.

FIG. 73A is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the second selection switch 194 is operated.

When the second selection switch 194 that can be operated by the player is operated while the first guidance display icon GI1 described later is displayed on the effect image display device 157, the effect image display device 157 has a third volume. The selection icon SI3 is displayed. The third volume selection icon SI3 displays five levels of volume level selection values and five levels of vertical level display (indicator display). On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 73 (a), the characters "volume 1/5" indicating that the selection value of the five-step volume level is 1 are displayed. Further, in the five-level display, only the lowest first level is lit in the fourth color (for example, green). Pressing the right button 168 of the second selection switch 194 once raises the level by one step, and pressing the left button 167 once lowers the level by one step. However, even if the left button 167 is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 73 (a), the level does not drop any further. That is, mute cannot be selected by operating the second selection switch 194. It should be noted that the mute may be selected by operating the second selection switch 194.

FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157 when the right button 168 is pressed four times from the state shown in the figure (a).

On the third volume selection icon SI3 shown in FIG. 73 (a), the characters "volume 5/5" indicating that the selection value of the five-step volume level is 5 are displayed. Further, in the five-step vertical level display, all the levels of the first to fifth steps are lit in the fourth color (for example, green).

The third volume selection icon SI3 displayed on the effect image display device 157 disappears if the left button 167 and the right button 168 are not operated for a predetermined time.

The volume selected by operating the first selection switch 190 has seven levels, whereas the volume selected by operating the second selection switch 194 has five levels. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67, the volume setting range is in the range of 0 to 127, and each setting value in the 7 steps is 18 for the first step, 36 for the second step, 54 for the third step, and 4 steps. The eyes are 73, the 5th stage is 91, the 6th stage is 109, and the 7th stage is 127. On the other hand, in the 5th stage, the remaining 2nd to 6th stages are obtained except for the 1st stage and the 7th stage of the 7th stage. That is, the second stage (36) of the seven stages is the first stage of the five stages, and the sixth stage (109) of the seven stages is the fifth stage of the five stages. Therefore, only the clerk of the amusement store can select the setting value (18) of the first stage of the seven stages and the setting value (127) of the seventh stage. The 1st stage (18) of the 7th stage may be the 1st stage of the 5th stage, the 5th stage (91) of the 7th stage may be the 5th stage of the 5th stage, or the 3rd stage (54) of the 7th stage. ) May be the first stage of the five stages, and the seventh stage (127) of the seven stages may be the fifth stage of the five stages. Alternatively, each set value in the five stages may be 26 for the first stage, 51 for the second stage, 76 for the third stage, 102 for the fourth stage, and 127 for the fifth stage.

With the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 and the first guidance display icon GI1 described later displayed on the effect image display device 157, the left button 167 of the second selection switch 194 is pressed once. When pressed, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed up to that point is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3, and the display indicates that the volume level selection value is the second stage. .. On the other hand, if the right button 167 is pressed once instead of the left button 167 in the same state, the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 that has been displayed up to that point is replaced with the third volume selection icon SI3. A display indicating that the selected value of the volume is the fourth stage is displayed. These displays are displayed regardless of the selection value displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. That is, regardless of whether the selection value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the left button 167 once displays the selection value of 2/5. Further, regardless of whether the selection value is 1/7 or 7/7, pressing the right button 168 once displays the selection value of 4/5. This is because when switching to the third volume selection icon SI3, the selection values up to that point are discarded, the value of the volume level of 3/5, which is the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3, is reselected, and the left button is displayed. By operating 167 or the right button 168, a change is added to the initial value (3/5). That is, when the operation of the second selection switch 194 is accepted, the initial value of the third volume selection icon SI3 is set, and the value obtained by operating the second selection switch 194 to change the initial value is the first value. 3 Volume selection icon Displayed with SI3. The first selection switch 190 is designed to be operated by a clerk, and the second selection switch 194 is designed to be operated by a player, and the intention of the player can be prioritized. On the contrary, when the first selection switch 190 is operated while the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed, the selection value displayed by the third volume selection icon SI3 is inherited and the first selection is made. When the switch 190 is operated, the value obtained by changing the selected value so far is displayed by the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2. However, even here, the initial value (for example, 4/7) of the first volume selection icon SI1 or the second volume selection icon SI2 may be set without inheriting the selected value.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 74. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel design. ROM 306 for storing sequences, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and WDT. (Watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request.

The main control unit 300 has a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). Start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 The index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) are monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed in the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are used as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the loading operation when loading. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and the light-shielding pieces provided on the reel frame pass through. Every time you do, it becomes L level. The rotation position information indicating how much the reel is rotated from the reference position from once reaching the L level to the next L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. Will be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero. This rotation position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. The drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 339 (effective line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game start lamp 121, storage number display. It is provided with a drive circuit 328 for driving a device 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and the basic circuit 402 temporarily stores data with the CPU 404. RAM 408, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with an upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the amplifier and the sound output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, title panel) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. 162 lamps, bet button lamps 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamps built in the first chance button 165, second effect lamps built in the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and the switch sensor 427 detects the pressing of the first chance button 165. Further, pressing of each of the second selection switch 194 including the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168 is also detected by the switch sensor 427. The detection signal from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 is output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, the first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. ..

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various effect drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ), Etc., and may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

According to the circuit configuration described above, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the control signal instructing the setting of the power saving mode to the drive circuit 422 or the second sub-control unit 500. As a result, the effect image display device 157 receives the control signal via the second sub-control unit 500, and the first effect lamp, the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight built in the first chance button 165. The module 740 receives the control signal without going through the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a demo animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the demo effect.

A predetermined time during which no operation is performed by the player while the animation (non-demo animation) displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed continuously from the game or after the game is completed. When the time (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the animation is switched to and the demo animation is started to be displayed. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67, the demo animation is roughly divided into five scenes. First, the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is displayed. In this opening animation, the entire screen on the production image display device 157 becomes white once, and then the company logo gradually begins to appear from the back of the white display screen, and finally, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), at the end. The corporate logo will appear completely. When the opening animation ends, the animation in which the character appears will start. At first, the animation (demo animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, appears, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), is displayed. Further, when the animation in which the character appears is started, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157. This first guidance display icon GI1 is an icon displayed only during the demonstration production. That is, it is displayed only in the animation in which the character in the demo animation appears. However, it may be displayed even in non-demo animation. The display of the second selection switch 194 is displayed on the first guidance display icon GI1. That is, the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 are both displayed in black, and the characters "volume adjustment" are also displayed in black. By operating the left button 167 and the right button 168, the upper speaker is displayed. It is suggested that the volume of the output sound from the 272 and the output sound from the bass speaker 277 can be adjusted. As described with reference to FIGS. 73A and 73B, if the left button 167 is pressed once while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed, the third volume selection icon SI3 is displayed. It is displayed, the volume level of 5 steps is lowered by 1 step, and when the right button 168 is pressed, the 3rd volume selection icon SI3 is also displayed, and this time, the volume level of 5 steps is raised by 1 step. Further, the display 166p of the second chance button 166 is displayed in white, and the characters "game information" are also displayed in white, suggesting that the game information is displayed by operating the second chance button 166. ing.

FIG. 76A is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect image display device 157, which is displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed.

The game information displayed when the second chance button 166 is pressed while the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed is a payout table. In the payout table shown in FIG. 76 (a), it is shown that eight medals are paid out when the bell-bell-bell symbol combination is aligned on the effective line described with reference to FIG. 68. -It is shown that 3 medals will be paid out when the combination of watermelon symbols is complete. It is also shown that if the cherry symbol stops in the middle symbol, two medals will be paid out. This dividend table is composed of a plurality of pages, and the dividend table shown in FIG. 76 (a) is the first page. The first guidance display icon GI1 displayed at the lower left of the display screen is replaced with the second guidance display icon GI2. In the second guidance display icon GI2, the characters "page move" are displayed in black for the display 167p of the left button 167 and the display 168p of the right button 168 displayed in black, and the left button 167 and the right button 168 are operated. It is suggested that the page of the dividend table can be changed by doing so. With the second guidance display icon GI2 displayed, pressing the left button 167 once advances the payout table page by one page, and pressing the right button 168 once advances the payout table page by one page. In addition, the character "end" is displayed in white with respect to the display 166p of the second chance button 166 displayed in white, and the display of the payout table can be terminated by operating the second chance button 166. Is suggested. When the second chance button 166 is pressed, the display of the payout table disappears on the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and the display of the non-demo animation is started. That is, when the second chance button 166 is operated while the demo animation is displayed, the demo production ends, and when the display of the payout table ends, the display of the non-demo animation starts.

The first guidance display icon GI1 described above corresponds to an example of the second display, and the display of the dividend table corresponds to an example of the response display.

In the demo animation, following the animation in which the main character, the lord, appears in FIG. 75 (b), the animation in which the princess appears (demo animation 3/5) shown in FIG. 75 (c) is displayed. Also in this animation, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Further, in the demo animation, following the animation in which the princess appears, the animation in which the old man appears (demo animation 4/5) shown in FIG. 75 (d) is displayed. Also in this animation, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed at the lower left. Then, at the end of the demo animation, the ending animation (demo animation 5/5) is displayed. In this ending animation, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), a warning display is displayed, and the first guidance display icon GI1 disappears. When the display of the ending animation is completed, the series of demo animations ends, and if the demo production continues, it returns to the above-mentioned opening animation (demo animation 1/5), the entire screen becomes white again, and then a series of series. The demo animation is displayed repeatedly until some operation is performed.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the setting to the power saving mode is selected while the non-demo animation is displayed.

In FIG. 77 (a), the effect image display device 157 displays an animation in which the lord is sitting on the upper seat and the old man is reading a letter. This animation is an animation that is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157 during the game, or is displayed on the effect image display device 157 after the game is completed, and is the demo animation described with reference to FIG. 75. It is a different animation (hereinafter referred to as "non-demo animation"). In this non-demo animation, the eyes and fans of the lord move, the grandfather's hand moves, and this non-demo animation is displayed. The brightness of the layer on which the non-demo animation is displayed in the effect image display device 157 is normal brightness, and the non-demo animation is reproduced in a bright state. Further, each figure of FIG. 77 has a first chance. A button 165, a second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown (FIG. 77). In the first chance button 165 shown in a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is lit in white. Both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in (a) are lit in white. Further, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 72) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white. The three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 77 (a) are illuminated in white.

The light emitting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emitting mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be turned on in the same color, blinked at the same timing, or turned off together. Alternatively, the light emitting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emitting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 72), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 77 (a), the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is in a state adjusted to “6” shown in FIG. 72 (a), and outputs from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth stage.

In the example shown in FIG. 77, in order to operate the first selection switch 190, a store clerk inserts a key into the key hole 140 and turns the inserted key clockwise to unlock and open the front door 102. Even when the key is used, when the front door 102 is opened, the above-mentioned opening sensor detects that the front door 102 has been opened, and the upper speaker 272 says "the door is open". The error notification sound of the error is repeatedly output, and the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of the door opening error by displaying characters such as "door opening". The output of the error notification sound of the door opening error and the display of the error display are continued until the front door 102 is closed. There are many players who think that the error notification sound is noisy to the surrounding players. Therefore, a clerk at a game store may open the front door 102 while holding the opening / closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened. By doing so, the opening / closing piece does not protrude, the opening of the front door 102 is not detected by the opening sensor, and the error notification of the door opening error is not performed. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the store clerk operates the first selection switch 190 with the front door 102 opened while holding the opening / closing piece. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 77 (b) and later does not display the error display of the door opening error. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, the store clerk performs a switch operation (1) in which the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to "7" shown in FIG. 72 (a).

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the effect image display device 157 has the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 73 (C). Is displayed, and it is notified that the volume level of the 7th stage is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the non-demo animation is continuously displayed, and even if the switch operation of the first selection switch 190 is performed, the non-demo animation is continuously displayed.

FIG. 78 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 77. In FIG. 78, time elapses from the left to the right of the figure, the timing of (c) in FIG. 78 coincides with the timing of FIG. 77 (c), and the timing of (d) in FIG. 78 is shown in FIG. It coincides with the timing of 77 (d), and the timing of (e) in FIG. 78 coincides with the timing of FIG. 77 (e). Further, FIG. 78 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 and the brightness of the animation display on the effect image display device 157, as well as the first effect lamp and the second chance built in the first chance button 165. Light emitting modes of various light emitting means such as a second effect lamp built in the button 166, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740 provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown. ..

At the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 78, the non-demo animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 with normal brightness, and the first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters "volume 7/7" are displayed is also displayed. The state of being is shown. It is also shown that the various light emitting means are lit in white.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “8” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the effect image display device 157 has the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 73 (D). Is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Even at the timing (c) in the timing chart of FIG. 78, the non-demo animation and the first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters “volume for exhibition” are displayed are displayed on the effect image display device 157. It is shown.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs a switch operation (3) for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “9” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

Until now, the non-power saving mode setting was selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power saving mode setting is selected and the volume level of the 7th stage is selected. It will be in the state of being done. FIG. 77 (d) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the switch operation (3) is performed. As shown in FIG. 78, the time from the switch operation (3) to the state shown in FIG. 77 (d) is shown in FIG. 77 (c) after the previous switch operation (2) is performed. The time from the switch operation (2) to the state shown in FIG. 77 (c) is shorter than the time to reach the state shown in FIG. 77 (e) after the switch operation (3) is performed. ) Is the same length as the time until the state is reached.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 77 (d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 77 (c) has the same second volume selection icon SI2 as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 73 (a). Is displayed overlapping, and in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 77 (e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. The replacement of the icons is also shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 78.

The character "power saving mode" is displayed on the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 77 (e). This display indicates that the setting of the power saving mode is selected, and the power saving mode is selected. It is not a display indicating that the mode has been set. The non-demo animation is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 77 (e), and remains in the non-demo state. Therefore, the power saving mode is not set, and as shown in the timing charts of FIGS. 77 (e) and 78, the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp built in the first chance button 165. The 144R and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 72) of each reel 110-112 remain lit white. Further, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 also remains lit in white. In addition, the non-demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark.

FIG. 79 shows the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened while the opening / closing piece is held while the demo animation is displayed and the selection is made to set the power saving mode. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The demo effect is started in FIG. 79 (a), and the display of the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) shown in FIG. 75 (a) is started on the effect image display device 157. That is, on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 79 (a), the company logo that has begun to gradually appear from the back is displayed in a state in which the entire display screen is once whitened and then gradually appears. Also, the demo animation is played in a bright state without being dark. Further, in each figure of FIG. 79, as in FIG. 77, the first chance button 165, the second selection switch 194 (first chance button 166, left button 167, right button 168), left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110-112 are shown. Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 79 (a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in white, and in the second chance button 166, the built-in second effect lamp is lit in white. .. Further, both the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 79A are lit in white. Further, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 72) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 79 (a) are illuminated by white. ..

In the demonstration effect, the light emission mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emission mode of the right side lamp 144R may be the same. For example, they may be turned on in the same color, blinked at the same timing, or turned off together. Alternatively, the light emitting mode of the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 and the light emitting mode of the left side lamp 144L may be the same. Further, of the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 (see FIG. 72), only the left side lamp 144L may be turned off. Alternatively, the first effect lamp may be blinking white, or the right side lamp 144R may be lit in red.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 is in a state of being adjusted to “6” shown in FIG. 72 (a), and outputs from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272. The volume is set to the volume level of the sixth stage.

Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 77, in the example shown in FIG. 79, the clerk of the game store opens the first selection switch 190 while holding the opening / closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 opens. To operate. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and later does not display the error display of the door opening error. Also, no error notification sound is output.

First, in this example as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 77, the switch operation (1) for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “7” shown in FIG. 72 (a) is performed by the store clerk.

When this switch operation (1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the effect image display device 157 has the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 73 (C). Is displayed, and it is notified that the volume level of the 7th stage is selected. Even if the front door 102 is opened, the demo animation is continuously displayed, and even if the switch operation of the first selection switch 190 is performed, the demo animation is continuously displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 79 (b) displays an animation (demo animation 2/5) in which the main character, the lord, is described using FIG. 75 (b). In the lower left, the first guide is displayed. The display of the display icon GI1 has started. The first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the first volume selection icon SI1, but conversely, the first volume selection icon SI1 is displayed as a part of the first guidance display icon GI1. It may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Next, the store clerk performs a switch operation (2) for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “8” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

When this switch operation (2) is performed, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), the effect image display device 157 has the same first volume selection icon SI1 as the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 73 (D). Is displayed to notify that the exhibition volume is selected. Further, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 79 (c) displays the animation (demo animation 3/5) in which the princess appears, which was described using FIG. 75 (c), and the first is displayed in the lower left. The guidance display icon GI1 continues to be displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 of the exhibition volume, which started to be displayed later than the first guidance display icon GI1, is overlapped with the first guidance display icon GI1.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs a switch operation (3) for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 to “9” shown in FIG. 72 (a).

Until now, the non-power saving mode setting was selected, but when this switch operation (3) is performed, the power saving mode setting is selected and the volume level of the 7th stage is selected. It will be in the state of being done.

FIG. 80 is a timing chart from the middle of the example shown in FIG. 79. Also in FIG. 80, as in FIG. 78, time elapses from the left to the right of the figure. Further, the timing of (c) in FIG. 80 coincides with the timing of FIG. 79 (c), and the timings of (d) to (h) thereafter correspond to the timings of FIGS. 79 (d) to (h). I am doing it. Further, FIG. 80 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, and a left side. Light emitting modes of various light emitting means such as a lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, and a backlight module 740 provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also shown.

At the left end of the timing chart of FIG. 80, the animation (demo animation 3/5) in which the princess appears is displayed in a bright state on the production image display device 157, and the characters "volume for exhibition" are displayed. The state in which the volume selection icon SI1 and the first guidance display icon GI1 are also displayed is shown. It is also shown that the various light emitting means are lit in white.

FIG. 79 (d) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the switch operation (3) is performed, and the states shown stepwise after the figure (d) are stepwise before the figure (c). It will be shown at shorter time intervals than the shown state.

When the power saving mode is selected while the demo effect is being executed, that is, the demo animation is being displayed, the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 79 (d), the power saving mode is already set, and the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 built in the first chance button 165 are respectively. The provided backlight module 740 is turned off to save power. That is, among the light emitting means that have been lit in white so far, the light emitting means other than the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. While the power saving mode is set, only this second effect lamp continues to light in white. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 79 (d), the first volume selection icon SI1 shown in FIG. 79 (c) has the same second volume selection as the second volume selection icon SI2 shown in FIG. 73 (a). The icons SI2 are displayed overlapping.

Furthermore, if it is selected to set the power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, the display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, as described above, if the power saving mode is selected while the demo animation is displayed, the power saving mode is set. Therefore, when the power saving mode is set, the demo animation is displayed. Is started from the beginning. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 77, even if the power saving mode is selected when the demo animation is not displayed, the power saving mode is not set and the demo animation is displayed. It doesn't even start from the beginning. As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 80, at the timing of FIG. 79 (d), the demo animation 3/5 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) of the demo animation is played back. Is also started.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 79 (e), the first volume selection icon SI1 is completely replaced with the second volume selection icon SI2. In addition, the display of the demo animation 3/5 has ended, and the company logo has begun to appear slightly on the display screen that has once become white due to the start of the opening animation (demo animation 1/5). Further, the first guidance display icon GI1 has disappeared.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 79 (f), the company logo has appeared fairly clearly, but since the second volume selection icon SI2 overlaps, the company logo is shown in FIG. 79 (a). It is more difficult to see than the state shown. Further, at the timing of FIG. 79 (f), the display of the power saving mode setting display AI for notifying that the power saving mode is set to "power saving mode is being set" is started at the lower part of the display screen.

At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (g), the demo animation begins to darken. When the demo animation starts to darken, it becomes more difficult to see than before it starts to darken, but the visibility of the power saving mode setting display AI and the second volume selection icon SI2 does not change, and the power saving mode setting display AI and The second volume selection icon SI2 is clearly visible. That is, the brightness of the display AI during the power saving mode setting and the brightness of the second volume selection icon SI2 do not change.

At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (h), the first guidance display icon GI1 that once disappeared is redisplayed. The redisplayed first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed on the foremost layer, overlaps a part of the second volume selection icon SI2, and also overlaps with the power saving mode setting display AI. The visibility of the first guide display icon GI1 is the same as that of the first guide display icon GI1 in FIG. 79 (b), and the first guide display icon GI1 can be clearly seen. That is, the brightness of the first guidance display icon GI1 does not change either.

The power saving mode setting display AI may be displayed on the foremost layer and may overlap with a part of the first guidance display icon GI1. Alternatively, the second volume selection icon SI2 may be displayed on the foremost layer and may overlap with a part of the first guidance display icon GI1 and also with a part of the power saving mode setting display AI.

The time from when the demo animation starts to darken on the effect image display device 157 until it becomes completely dark (FIGS. 79 (g) to (h)) is the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, left. The time for the backlight modules 740 provided on the side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the three reels 110 to 112 to be turned off at the timing of FIG. 79 (d) is longer than that of the time. When the demo animation suddenly becomes dark, the player may think that the production image display device 157 is out of order or be surprised, but by darkening the demo animation over time in this way, the transition to the power saving mode is made. May be noticed by the player.

It should be noted that even when the store clerk performs a switch operation for adjusting the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 72 (a) during the display of the demo animation in the power saving mode. The display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set to the non-power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, it is set to the non-power saving mode, and if it is set to the non-power saving mode, the demo animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played dark will now play brightly. Light emitting means (first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110 to 112) that were turned off in the power saving mode before the demo animation became bright. The backlight module 740) provided in each starts lighting. On the other hand, even if it is selected to set from the power saving mode to the non-power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the setting does not change because it is already set to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation. The display of is not started from the beginning.

When the second chance button 166, which is lit in white, is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1 while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, the display of the demo animation ends, and the figure. The payout table shown in 76 (a) is displayed. Also, when the left button 167 or the right button 168 is pressed according to the first guidance display icon GI1, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation is changed to the non-demo animation (for example, the animation of the lord and the grandfather shown in FIG. 77). ), And the third volume selection icon SI3 described with reference to FIG. 73 (a) and FIG. 73 (a) is displayed.

Also, when the first chance button 165, which is turned off, is pressed while the power saving mode is set, the mode returns to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation is changed to the non-demo animation (for example, the lord shown in FIG. 77). And grandfather's animation), and a certain production may be started.

FIG. 76 (b) is a diagram showing a display screen displayed when the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 79 (h).

In the state shown in FIG. 79 (h), the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed on the display screen of the effect image display device 157. As described above, the first guidance display icon GI1 does not include the display of the first chance button 165, and the first guidance display icon GI1 is not a display relating to the first chance button 165. Further, since the power saving mode is executed, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is turned off. In this state, not only is it not promoting the pressing of the first chance button 165, but there is no suggestion regarding the first chance button 165. Nevertheless, when the first chance button 165 is operated, the setting suggestion display of the slot machine 100 is displayed as the above-mentioned effect. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, set values having different degrees of advantage for the player are set. As the setting value, setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared. The higher the set value, the higher the advantage of the player tends to be. The player usually cannot know this set value, but as shown in FIG. 76 (b), a setting suggestion display may be displayed. If only the character of the lord is displayed, it suggests an odd number (settings 1, 3, 5). If only the grandfather's character is displayed, it suggests an even number (settings 2, 4, and 6). If only the princess character is displayed, it suggests that the setting is 3 or higher. If both the lord and princess characters are displayed, it suggests that setting 5 or setting 6. When such a setting suggestion display is performed, the first chance button 165 corresponds to a hidden button.

Even if the first chance button 165 is pressed in the state of FIGS. 79 (d) to 79 (g) before the first guide display icon GI1 is displayed, the setting suggestion display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. On the contrary, in the state of FIGS. 79 (d) to 79 (g), even if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the setting suggestion display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157. You may do it. Further, whether or not the setting suggestion display is displayed may be determined by a lottery when the first chance button 165 is pressed, or may be determined by the pressing timing.

FIG. 81 shows the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the front door 102 is opened and the power saving mode is selected without pressing the open / close piece while the demo animation is displayed. It is a figure which shows step by step.

The example shown in FIG. 81 is an example while the error notification of the door opening error is performed. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 79 in which the error notification of the door opening error is stopped will be mainly described.

In the example shown in FIG. 81, a clerk at a game store opens the front door 102 before the demo animation starts. At this time, the clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 without pressing the opening / closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened, so that the error notification of the door opening error is started. That is, the effect image display device 157 displays an error display of a door opening error by displaying characters such as "door is opening", and a door opening error such as "door is open" is displayed from the upper speaker 272 (not shown in FIG. 81). Error notification sound is output repeatedly.

In FIG. 81 (a), the demo effect is started, and the display of the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) is started on the effect image display device 157. At the upper left of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, an error display EI1 of a door opening error due to a character display such as "door opening" is displayed. This error display EI1 is displayed on the foremost layer and continues to be displayed until the front door 102 is closed.

Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 81 (a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. .. On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is lit in white. The left side lamp 144L is also lit in white. Further, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 72) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 81 (a) are illuminated by white. ..

The store clerk performs the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the effect image display device 157 displaying the demo animation in which the lord appears is "volume 7". The first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters "/ 7" are displayed is displayed. Further, in the lower left, the display of the first guidance display icon GI1 is started.

Next, the store clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. 81 (c), the effect image display device 157 on which the demo animation in which the princess appears is displayed. The first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters "volume for exhibition" are displayed is displayed. Further, the first guidance display icon GI1 is displayed in the lower left.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, and the slot machine 100 is set to the power saving mode. In FIG. 81 (d), the power saving mode is already set, but only the backlight module 740 provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 is turned off. That is, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165 is still lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red. Further, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is still lit in white, and the left side lamp 144L is also lit in white. The light-off state of the backlight module 740 continues until the setting of the power saving mode is completed.

In addition, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning, and while the demo animation 3/5 in which the princess appears is displayed, the opening animation (demo animation 1/5) of the demo animation is also started to be played. Further, in the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 81 (d), the second volume selection icon SI2 is displayed overlapping with the first volume selection icon SI1. Even if the power saving mode is set, the error display EI1 remains displayed. The following is the same as the example shown in FIG. 79 except that the mode of various light emitting means and the error display EI1 are continuously displayed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Also in this example, during the display of the demo animation in the power saving mode, the clerk performed a switch operation to adjust the indicator unit 190b of the first selection switch 190 from "9" to "8" shown in FIG. 72 (a). Even in this case, the display of the demo animation starts from the beginning. That is, if it is selected to set to the non-power saving mode while the demo animation is displayed, it is set to the non-power saving mode, and if it is set to the non-power saving mode, the demo animation is displayed from the beginning. The demo animation that was started and played dark will now play brightly. Light emitting means (first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, and three reels 110 to 112) that were turned off in the power saving mode before the demo animation became bright. The backlight module 740) provided in each starts lighting. On the other hand, even if it is selected to set from the power saving mode to the non-power saving mode when the demo animation is not displayed, the setting does not change because it is already set to the non-power saving mode, and the demo animation. The display of is not started from the beginning.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the effect image display device 157 and various lamps when the power saving mode is selected while the hopper empty error is still generated.

A motor-driven medal ejection device 180 (see FIG. 69) is provided inside the slot machine 100, and during the medal payout operation, the game medals in the bucket are lost and the medal payout sensor has passed a predetermined first time. If it does not turn on even if it does not turn on and recovery cannot be performed even if the recovery process of rotating the motor in the reverse direction is performed, a hopper empty error is notified. For an empty hopper error, open the front door 102 to replenish the bucket with medals and press the reset button provided inside the slot machine 100, or close the front door 102 and press the key inserted in the key hole 140 to the left. The error is canceled by turning to.

FIG. 82A is a diagram showing a state in which a hopper empty error has occurred. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 82 (a), the error notification is displayed in the background display of the error notification (background display of the diagonal hatching). That is, the error display EI2 that cannot identify the error that occurred, such as "error occurred", and the error display EI3 that explains how to cancel the hopper empty error, such as "please replenish the medals and then press the reset switch". It is displayed. In addition, an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Please call a clerk" may be displayed.

Further, in the first chance button 165 shown in FIG. 82 (a), the built-in first effect lamp is lit in red, and the right side lamp 144R is also lit in red in conjunction with the first effect lamp. .. On the other hand, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 is turned off. Further, the left side lamp 144L is lit in white. Further, the backlight modules 740 (see FIG. 72) provided on each of the three reels 110 to 112 are also lit in white, and the three reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 82 (a) are illuminated by white. ..

The clerk of the game store opens the front door 102 without pressing the opening / closing piece, and performs the switch operation (1) in which the indicator 190b of the first selection switch 190 is set to “7” shown in FIG. 72 (a). Since the effect image display device 157 displays an error display EI2 such as "error has occurred", the error notification of the door opening error is also used for this error display EI2, and the characters such as "door opening" shown in FIG. 81 are also used. The error display EI of the door opening error by the display is not displayed. Also, the error notification sound of the door open error such as "door is open" is not output. It should be noted that an error notification sound indicating an instruction to the player such as "please replenish medals" may be output. Alternatively, the error display EI of the door opening error may be displayed, or the error notification sound of the door opening error may be output.

As a result of the switch operation (1) of the first selection switch 190 being performed by the store clerk, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the effect image display device 157 on which the background display of the error notification is displayed is "volume". The first volume selection icon SI1 on which the characters "7/7" are displayed overlaps with the error display EI2 such as "error has occurred". The first volume selection icon SI1 may be displayed on the foremost layer, and if an error display indicating an instruction to the player such as "Call a clerk" is also performed, this error display is performed. It is also displayed overlapping. Alternatively, the error display EI3 explaining how to cancel the hopper empty error may be displayed on the foremost layer.

Next, the store clerk performs the switch operation (2) of the first selection switch 190, and as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the effect image display device 157 in which the background display of the error notification is still displayed is "exhibited. The first volume selection icon SI1 in which the characters "Meeting volume" are displayed is displayed.

Subsequently, the store clerk performs the switch operation (3) of the first selection switch 190, selects the setting of the power saving mode, and sets the volume level to the state in which the volume level of the seventh stage is selected. However, since the state shown in FIG. 82 (d) is not the state in which the demo effect is being executed, the power saving mode is not set and the display of the demo animation is not started from the beginning. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 82 (d), the second volume selection icon SI2 in which the characters "power saving mode" are displayed instead of the first volume selection icon SI1 causes an error such as "an error has occurred". It is displayed overlapping with the display EI2.

Further, in FIG. 82 (d), there is no change in the mode of the various light emitting means, and only the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 remains extinguished.

In the above description, the power saving mode is not set unless the demo effect is executed, but if the power saving mode setting is selected, the game is being performed. However, the power saving mode may be set.

In addition, when the power saving mode is set, the animation is played in a dark state to save power, and the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, which are built in the first chance button 165, are shown in the figure. Although power is saved by turning off the backlight module 740 shown in 72, power saving may be performed in other devices as well. For example, when the power saving mode is set, the output sound from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 may be lowered, the effect movable body may be immovable, or the movement may be restricted. Alternatively, the brightness of the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157 may be reduced, not limited to the reproduction of the animation. Further, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166 may also be turned off. Further, the light emitting means such as the first effect lamp, the second effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740 are not completely turned off, but the brightness (light amount) is reduced. Even in a dimmed state, it leads to power saving.

Further, the timing for starting power saving is the first effect lamp, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740 (timing of FIG. 79 (d)), and the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 79 (FIG. 79). Although it differs depending on the timing) of g), power saving is started first by the first effect lamp, the right side lamp 144R, and the backlight module 740, and later by the right side lamp 144R and the effect image display device 157. You may want to start saving electricity. Further, in addition to the effect image display device 157, a second effect image display device having a small display screen is provided, and the second effect image display device starts power saving first, and then the effect image display device 157 starts power saving. You may do so. Further, the combination of the light emitting means and the sound output means, the combination of the effect movable body and the display means, the combination of the light emitting means and the effect movable body, the combination of the effect movable body and the sound output means, the combination of the display means and the sound output means, etc. The timing for starting power saving may be different.

Further, although the brightness (light amount) of various lamps could not be selected by the operation of the first selection switch 190, the brightness (light amount) level of various lamps is also the brightness (light amount) level of various lamps of the first selection switch 190 as well as the volume level. It may be possible to select by operation.

Further, in the explanation so far, the slot machine 100 has been taken as an example, but the selection of the volume level by the operation of the first selection switch 190 and the selection of setting to the power saving mode described above are pachinko. It can also be applied to machines.

FIG. 83 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100P has an opening opened upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150P, which is located below the ball tank 150P for temporarily storing the game ball and the ball tank 150P. A tank rail 154P for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152P located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152P is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside the payout device 152P. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154P and has flowed down into the payout device 152P is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Therefore, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P is configured by this configuration. Pay out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152P, there is a main board case 158P for accommodating the main board 156P constituting the main control unit that performs control processing for the entire game, and control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit. The first sub-board case 162P for accommodating the first sub-board 160P constituting the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit for performing control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit are configured. The second sub-board case 165P for accommodating the second sub-board 164P, and the pay-out board 170P including a payout control unit for performing control processing related to payout of game balls and an error release switch 168P for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk. Consists of a payout board case 172P that houses the launch board case 172P, a launch board case 176P that houses the launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing related to launching a game ball, and a power supply control unit that supplies power to various electrical game devices. A power supply board case 184P for accommodating a power supply board 182P including a power supply switch 178P that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180P that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit when the power is turned on. A CR interface unit 186P for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit and the card unit is provided.

The RWM clear switch 180P is a switch capable of performing RWM clear (RAM initialization) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100P while operating the machine. When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 180P is being operated, a predetermined notification (for example, "Please press again to clear the RAM" is displayed, a sound, or a character display is displayed. And sound), and when the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

Further, on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162P, the same first selection switch 190P as the first selection switch 190 shown in FIG. 72 (a) is arranged. Since the first selection switch 190P is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100P, a person who can unlock the front frame door of the pachinko machine 100P (for example, a clerk of a game store) can use the front frame door. The operation can be performed by opening the door, but a person who cannot unlock the front frame door (for example, a player) cannot perform the operation.

The RWM clear switch 180P is located at the lower left of the back surface, and the first selection switch 190P is located at the upper left of the back surface, but the RWM clear switch 180P is located at a position that is more difficult to operate than the first selection switch 190P (for example, the front frame). It may be placed at a position far from the gap created when the door is opened), or vice versa.

According to the above description
"Light emitting means [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740, the second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166]. ,
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] and
Power saving mode setting can be selected according to the operation [for example, when the indicator unit 190b is matched with any of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 72 (a)]. [For example, first selection switch 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, a left side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R, a backlight module 740] and a second light emitting means [for example. , The second effect lamp built into the second chance button 166] is included.
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the first light emitting means is in a first state corresponding to the power saving mode setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimming state]. ], And it may shift to
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the display means is in a second state corresponding to the power saving mode setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is played in a dark state. ], And it may shift to
When the selection operation means is operated, the power saving mode setting is selected, and the display means shifts to the second state, the first light emitting means shifts to the first state [for example, , FIG. 79 (d)] and then [for example, FIG. 79 (g) to FIG. 79 (h)],
The first light emitting means does not shift to the first state even if the selection operation means is operated while the non-demo animation is displayed and the power saving mode setting is selected [for example, FIG. 77 (d)], when the selection operation means in a state in which the demonstration animation is displayed is the operation setting該省power mode is selected all SANYO to shift to the state of the first [e.g., FIG. 79 (d)],
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the display means is displaying the demo animation, the display means does not display the display of the demo animation to the end and the demo animation is displayed. you start with the first display of the new [e.g., FIG. 79 (d)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.
In addition, according to the above description,
"The first device [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740] and
A second device [for example, an effect image display device 157],
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the indicator 190b is set to match any of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 72 (a). When], the operation means for selection [for example, the first selection switch 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device shifts to a first state [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting. Is something that may happen
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device is in a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which a demo animation is played in a dark state. ]
May move to
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device moves after the first device shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 79 (d)]. The transition to the second state may occur [for example, FIG. 79 (g) to FIG. 79 (h)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game console, it may be easy to confirm that the first device has transitioned to the first state and that the second device has transitioned to the second state. That is, since there is a time lag, it may be possible to confirm the first state of the first device and then confirm the second state of the second device.

also,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first device does not shift to the first state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. ,
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second device does not shift to the second state unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. ,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The above-mentioned certain state means a state in which a demonstration effect is being performed (demo state).

also,
"The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example," 0 "in which the indicator 190b is shown in FIG. 72 (a). ~ When matched to any of "8"]
The first device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
The second device consumes less power when set to the first setting than when set to the second setting.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

also,
"The number of the first devices [eg, 6] is greater than the number of the second devices [eg, 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first device having a large number can be preferentially shifted to the first state, and the power consumption can be suppressed.

also,
"The power consumption of the first device [for example, 0] in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the second device in the second state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first device has a higher power saving effect than the second device.

The power consumption of the first device while executing a certain effect may be larger than the power consumption of the second device performing the certain effect. It is possible to reduce the power consumption by giving priority to the first device having a large power consumption and shifting to the first state.

also,
"The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"A first control means for controlling the first device [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] and
A second control means [for example, VDP516] that controls the second device, and
Equipped with
The first control means transmits the first signal relating to the first setting.
The first device receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means.
The second device receives the first signal via the second control means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command are provided, and the sub-control means is the first. It may have the control means of the above and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling the effect.

also,
"The time required for the second device to transition from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 79 (g) to 79 (h)] is the first state. It is longer than the time required for the device to move from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 79 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The first device is a first effect means [for example, a first light emitting means, a first display means].
The second device is a second effect means [for example, a second light emitting means, a second display means].
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second effect means shifts to the second state after the first effect means shifts to the first state. May do,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 83].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

note that,
"A game table including a first notification means, a second notification means, and an operation means capable of setting a first effect setting, wherein the operation means is operated to set the first effect. When is set, the first notification means becomes the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting, and then the second notification means becomes the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting. A game table featuring. "
Was also explained.

also,
"The operating means is a means capable of setting a second effect setting by being operated, and the first effect setting is a setting in which the power consumption of the notification means is suppressed as compared with the second effect setting. A game table characterized by being. "
Was also explained.

also,
"A game table characterized in that the number of the first notification means is larger than the number of the second notification means."
Was also explained.

also,
"A game table characterized in that the power consumption of the first notifying means that is notifying a certain notification is larger than the power consumption of the second notifying means that is notifying the certain notification."
Was also explained.

also,
"The operating means is a game table characterized in that the operating means is a means that the player cannot operate."
Was also explained.

also,
"The first control means and the second control means are provided, and the first notification means transmits a signal relating to the first effect setting from the first control means via the second control means. The second notification means receives the signal from the first control means regarding the first effect setting via the second control means. A featured game table. "
Was also explained.

also,
"The time required from the notification mode not corresponding to the first effect setting to the notification mode corresponding to the first effect setting is longer for the second notification means than for the first notification means. A game table characterized by being long. "
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] and
A selection operation means [for example, the first selection switch 190] capable of selecting the first setting [for example, the setting of the power saving mode] according to the operation, and
It is a game table equipped with
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected [for example, when the indicator 190b is adjusted to any of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 72 (a). ], The display means may start displaying the first animation [for example, a demo animation] from the beginning [for example, FIG. 79 (d)],.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, it becomes easy to check the first animation from the beginning.

also,
"The display means is the first when the selection operation means is operated during the display of the first animation [for example, the switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 79] and the first setting is selected. The display of the animation of is restarted from the beginning [for example, FIG. 79 (d)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first animation may be a demo animation. The demo animation is an animation in which display is started on the display means after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in a state where the game is not restarted after the end of one game. In other words, the demo animation starts when the time when no operation by the player is performed while the second animation (non-demo animation) is displayed reaches a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It is an anime that is done.

also,
"In the display means, the selection operation means is operated while the second animation [for example, the non-demo animation shown in FIG. 77] is displayed [for example, the switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 77]. Even if the setting is selected, the display of the first animation is not started from the beginning [for example, the example shown in FIG. 78],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"In the display means, even if the selection operation means is operated during the display of the second animation [for example, the switch operation (3) shown in FIG. 77] and the first setting is selected, the second setting is selected. The display of the animation is continued [for example, FIG. 77 (d)],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second animation may be an animation that is not displayed in the certain state (for example, a demo state).

also,
"When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected while the first animation is being displayed, the display means displays the first animation that has started to be displayed from the beginning. [For example, FIG. 79 (g) to FIG. 79 (h)], which is displayed in a display mode [for example, a darkened display mode] corresponding to the setting of.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"For example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740] are provided.
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the effect means shifts to a first state [for example, a light-off state or a dimmed state] corresponding to the first setting. There is,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means changes to a second state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a state in which the demo animation is played in a dark state]. It may be migrated,
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means is the second display after the effect means shifts to the first state [for example, FIG. 79 (d)]. There is a case where the state shifts to [for example, FIG. 79 (g) to FIG. 79 (h)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The effect means may be a light emitting means. Further, the first state may mean a state in which the effect means executes an effect corresponding to the first setting. Further, the second state means a state in which the first animation is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the first setting.

also,
"The effect means is the first state unless the first animation is displayed [for example, a demo state] even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected. Does not move to
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means is in the second state unless the first animation is displayed [for example, a demo state]. It does not migrate,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a non-power saving mode (normal mode) setting] according to the operation [for example," 0 "in which the indicator 190b is shown in FIG. 72 (a). ~ When matched to any of "8"]
The effect means that the power consumption is suppressed when the first setting is set as compared with the case where the second setting is set.
The display means that is set to the first setting has lower power consumption than that set to the second setting.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

also,
"The number of the effect means [for example, 6] is larger than the number of the display means [for example, 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give priority to the production means having a large number and shift to the first state, and to suppress power consumption.

also,
"The power consumption of the effect means [for example, 0] in the first state is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the effect of the effect is higher than that of the display means.

The power consumption of the effect means that is executing a certain effect may be larger than the power consumption of the display means that is executing the effect. It is possible to reduce the power consumption by giving priority to the effect means having a large power consumption and shifting to the first state.

also,
"The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"A first control means for controlling the effect means [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] and
A second control means [for example, VDP516] that controls the display means, and
Equipped with
The first control means transmits the first signal relating to the first setting.
The effect means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means.
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command are provided, and the sub-control means is the first. It may have the control means of the above and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling the effect.

also,
"The time required for the display means to shift from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 79 (g) to 79 (h)] is such that the effect means is the first. It is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from one state to the first state [for example, FIG. 79 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 83].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to the above description
"The first light emitting means [for example, the first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, the left side lamp 144L, the right side lamp 144R, the backlight module 740] and
A second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166] and
The first setting [for example, power saving mode setting] can be selected according to the operation [for example, the indicator 190b is set to match any of "9" or "A" to "F" shown in FIG. 72 (a). When], the operation means for selection [for example, the first selection switch 190] and
It is a game table equipped with
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means shifts to a state corresponding to the first setting [for example, a light-off state or a dimming state]. [For example, FIG. 79 (d)],
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the second light emitting means does not shift to the state corresponding to the first setting [for example, the extinguished state or the dimmed state]. [For example, in FIG. 79 (d), it remains lit in white],
A game table featuring that. 』\
Explained.

According to this game table, the difference between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is recognized by simultaneously recognizing the transition to the state corresponding to the first setting and the non-transition. It may be easier.

also,
"The first operating means [for example, the first chance button 165] and
A second operating means [for example, a second chance button 166],
Equipped with
The first operating means has the first light emitting means [for example, a first effect lamp].
The second operating means has the second light emitting means [for example, a second effect lamp].
The selection operation means can select a second setting [for example, a setting of a non-power saving mode (normal mode)] according to the operation [for example, "0" to "0" shown in FIG. 72 (a) for the indicator unit 190b. If it matches any of "8"]
The first setting is a setting that suppresses the power consumption of the first light emitting means as compared with the second setting.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The player can easily recognize that the first operating means can be operated by turning on or blinking the first light emitting means. Further, the player can easily recognize that the second operating means can be operated by turning on or blinking the second light emitting means. Further, the first setting is a power saving setting, and the second operating means having the second light emitting means that does not shift to the state corresponding to this setting is operated even if the first setting is set. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is possible. Further, as a result, the load applied to the first operating means can be reduced.

also,
"Display means [for example, effect image display device 157] is provided.
The display means can display a second display [for example, the first guidance display icon GI1] relating to the second operation means in a state where the first setting is set [for example, FIG. 79]. (B) -Fig. (D) and Fig. (H)],
When the second display is displayed on the display means and the operation of the second operation means is performed with the first setting set, the display means displays a response to the operation [for example, Dividend table shown in FIG. 76 (a)] is displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second display may be an operation promotion display that promotes the operation of the second operation means, or may be an operation promotion display that suggests the operation of the second operation means. , The display may be such that the second operating means is displayed. For example, the first guidance display icon GI1 corresponds to this second display as an example.

also,
"When the second display is displayed on the display means and the operation of the first operation means is performed with the first setting set, the display means displays a response to the operation [for example," , Setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 76 (b)] may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be surprised by displaying the response by operating the operation means that seems to be invalid.

The state in which the first setting is set may be a demo state. That is, the power saving setting is set in the demo state. The state in which the response display may be displayed on the display means may be a non-demo state (normal state) shifted from the demo state. That is, when the operation of the first operating means is performed, the demo state shifts to the non-demo state (normal state), and even if the operation of the first operating means is performed instead of the second operating means. The response display may be performed as an effect, or the first operation means may be a hidden operation means and the game information may be displayed as the response display.

Further, the response display for the operation of the first operating means performed by displaying the second display may be the same display as the response display for the operation of the second operating means, or may be displayed differently. There may be.

also,
When the operation of the first operating means is performed in the state where the first setting is set [for example, whether the second display is displayed or not], the display means In some cases, a response display to the operation [for example, a setting suggestion display shown in FIG. 76 (b)] may be displayed.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may be surprised by displaying the response by operating the operation means that seems to be invalid.

Here, the display means may or may not display the second display. The response display to the operation of the first operating means performed by hiding the second display may be the same display as the response display to the operation of the second operating means, or may be a different display. May be good.

also,
"If the operation of the first operating means is performed with the first setting set, the display means may not display the response display to the operation.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The display means may shift to a state corresponding to the first setting when the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected.
When the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the state in which the first light emitting means corresponds to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as "first state") [for example, After shifting to the [off state or dimmed state] [for example, FIG. 79 (d)], the display means corresponds to the first setting (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, demo. It may shift to [a state in which the animation is played in a dark state] [for example, FIG. 79 (g) to FIG. 79 (h)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the first light emitting means is in a state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. It does not migrate,
Even if the selection operation means is operated and the first setting is selected, the display means does not shift to the state corresponding to the first setting unless it is in a certain state [for example, a demo state]. Is,
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, a certain state means a state in which a demonstration effect is being performed (demo state).

also,
"In the first light emitting means, the power consumption is suppressed when the first setting is set as compared with the case where the second setting is set.
The display means that is set to the first setting has lower power consumption than that set to the second setting.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first setting is a power saving setting, while the second setting is a non-power saving setting (normal setting).

also,
"The number of the first light emitting means [for example, 6] is larger than the number of the display means [for example, 1].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the first light emitting means having a large number can be preferentially shifted to the first state, and the power consumption can be suppressed.

also,
"The power consumption of the first light emitting means in the first state [for example, 0] is smaller than the power consumption of the display means in the second state.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first light emitting means has a higher power saving effect than the display means.

The power consumption of the first light emitting means while executing a certain effect may be larger than the power consumption of the display means performing the certain effect. It is possible to reduce the power consumption by giving priority to the first light emitting means having a large power consumption and shifting to the first state.

also,
"A first control means for controlling the first light emitting means [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] and
A second control means [for example, VDP516] that controls the display means, and
Equipped with
The first control means transmits the first signal relating to the first setting.
The first light emitting means receives the first signal from the first control means without going through the second control means.
The display means receives the first signal via the second control means.
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

A main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means and performing control based on the command are provided, and the sub-control means is the first. It may have the control means of the above and the second control means. Further, the sub-control means may be a means for controlling the effect.

also,
"The time required for the display means to shift from a state different from the second state to the second state [for example, FIGS. 79 (g) to 79 (h)] is the first light emitting means. Is longer than the time required to transition from a state different from the first state to the first state [for example, FIG. 79 (d)].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The selection operation means is provided at a position where the player cannot operate [for example, the inside of the main body 101 or the back side of the game table].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 67].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

also,
"The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 83].
A game table featuring that. 』\
Was also explained.

The identification prefixes such as "first-", "second-", "third-", etc. described above may be replaced as appropriate. For example, "second ~" may be replaced with "first ~".

It should be noted that the actions and effects described in the embodiments described so far are merely a list of the most suitable actions and effects, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are limited to those described here. is not it. Further, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendices, etc. are applied to other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

In the game console (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are loaded, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). The rotation is started by accepting the operation by the start lever), and based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, the operation by the stop button described later), the winning or not of the internal winning of multiple types of roles is determined by lottery. Judgment is made, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped is determined. It is a game table that advances a series of games in which a game medium is paid out and the game is terminated if the predetermined payout conditions are met, and a game is ended without the game medium being paid out if the game medium is not met.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 84 to 90. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 84 to 90 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the description of the present embodiment. Priority is given to the reference numerals 84 to 90. Moreover, each embodiment of this embodiment and each embodiment of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine will be described. The slot machine includes a main body and a front door that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body. Inside the center of the main body, three reels (left reel, middle reel, right reel) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored so that they can rotate inside the slot machine. These three reels are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reel are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

The first to third bet buttons are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine. In the present embodiment, each time the first bet button is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, one is inserted, and when the second bet button is pressed, two cards are inserted and the third bet button is pressed. Then, three sheets are thrown in. Hereinafter, the third bet button is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The third bet button also functions as an effect button capable of starting a certain effect when an operation is accepted. Hereinafter, the third bet button is also referred to as a production button.

The start lever is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the three reels. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot or the first to third bet buttons are operated and the start lever is operated, the three reels start to rotate. The operation on the start lever is called the start operation of the game.

The left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button are button-type push switches for individually stopping the three reels that have started rotation by operating the start lever, and are provided corresponding to each reel. ing. More specifically, the left reel can be stopped by operating the left stop button, the middle reel can be stopped by operating the middle stop button, and the right can be stopped by operating the right stop button. The reel can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop button is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation, which is the target of the first stop operation. The reel to be stopped may be referred to as a first stop reel, a reel subject to a second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel subject to a third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons for stopping all the rotating reels are stopped is called an operation order or a push order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel and the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel is called "reverse push". Called "operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The high navigation state lamp is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp.

An effect device is arranged on the upper part of the front door. This effect device is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) consisting of two right shutters and a left shutter that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device arranged behind the shutter, and the right shutter and the left. When the shutter opens horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device appears in front of the slot machine (on the player side). The liquid crystal display device of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, an operation order and operation timing of stop buttons).

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine will be described. The control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control unit that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit to control the main effects. It is composed of a first sub-control unit to be performed and a second sub-control unit that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit.

The main control unit includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit, and enables communication with the first sub control unit. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can send commands and other signals to the first sub control unit, but the first sub control unit controls the main control. Cannot send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit based on the control command. The first sub-control unit controls sound output means (speakers, sound source ICs, etc.), various lamps, and the like.

The second sub-control unit includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit based on the control command. The second sub-control unit controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described.

The symbol displayed on the upper row of the left reel is the symbol on the upper row of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel is the symbol on the middle row of the left reel, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the left reel is the symbol on the lower row of the left reel, and the symbol on the upper row of the middle reel. The displayed symbol is the middle reel upper symbol, the symbol displayed in the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed in the lower middle reel is the middle reel lower symbol, and the symbol displayed in the right reel is the upper symbol. The design displayed on the upper part of the right reel and the middle part of the right reel is called the middle part of the right reel, and the design displayed on the lower part of the right reel is called the lower part of the right reel. A total of nine are displayed on each reel, three in the vertical direction.

In the present embodiment, one winning line of the middle-stage winning line composed of the left reel middle-stage symbol, the middle-reel middle-stage symbol, and the right-reel middle-stage symbol is provided. The winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine of this embodiment can play a 3-card or 2-card bet, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, no winning line is valid and 3 or 2 medals are inserted. The winning line becomes valid when bet. When the winning line is activated, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, it is composed of a right-down winning line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, and a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three winning lines rising to the right may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine will be described.

The winning combination of the slot machine includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2), a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13, small role 1 to small role 5), and the like. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles for shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination 1, The prizes for the special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 13 are included.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the three-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the two-card betting game. No medals will be paid out due to winning the role itself.

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1 or the special role 2, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2. Further, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 winning cards by BB1 and 55 winning cards by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special gaming state (RT4) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 13)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. "Small role (small role 1 to small role 5)" is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the reel stop control will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination described later), and the selected reel stop is performed. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is a control that shifts the stop position of the reel within a range (pull-in range; here, a maximum of 4 frames) within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) after the player operates each stop button. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data has a permissible control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed together on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display all the symbol combinations of any winning combination on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, when an internal winning combination is internally won or when a special winning combination is being internally won (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button is bad. Is also controlled so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each stop button.

For example, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged over 4 frames, so if the timing to operate the stop button is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will not stop at the winning line. ..

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels and the number of frames drawn in, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example of prohibition control, for example, the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button is good. Is also controlled so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine will be described.

The main control unit of the slot machine is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) in the replay high probability state, and a special role 2 internal winning state in the replay high probability state (RT2). It has RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-based gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit also controls the state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as the AT system gaming state), and the first control unit determines the AT system gaming state. The sub-control unit is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 (E).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the conditional device related to the replaying combination varies from the default state.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest among other game states (for example, a game state excluding a special game state) (disadvantageous to the player), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also.

If the special role 1 is internally won, the system shifts to the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later, and if the special role 2 is internally won, the system shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later. do.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player stops the operation at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag.

In the special role internal winning state, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed, the state shifts to the special game state (RT4) described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states.

In the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of cards is paid out, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, if more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the special gaming state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, when more than 55 medals are paid out, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is entered. ..

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described.

The AT-type game state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the correct operation order when the push order is internally won. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state or maintaining an advantageous gaming state. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display and the effect image display device.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings a favorable result to the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet number when playing a game for a predetermined period. The ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state (normal game state) in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), for example, the route shifts to the AT1 state (judgment state), and the AT1 state (judgment state) directly shifts to the AT2 state, or via the pullback state. There is a route that shifts to the normal game state or the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games). Further, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
Each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called a production state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state has a normal state, and the high navigation state effect state has a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. In addition, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls to be ejected increases.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit will be described.

The effect table provided for each effect state is stored in the storage means (for example, ROM) of the first sub-control unit. The first sub control unit acquires the effect information (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, effect state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit, and refers to the effect table corresponding to the effect state and the like. , The production is performed according to the production status counter and the like. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the AT1 effect described later from the ROM is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the judge effect described later from the ROM is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

When a certain condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit selects a predetermined effect from a plurality of types of effects using the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A, and selects the predetermined effect according to the current set value. The effect data for executing the above is read from the ROM, and the setting suggestion A (for example, the display of the character image) described later is displayed.

Further, when a certain condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit selects a predetermined effect from a plurality of types of effects using the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B, and selects a predetermined effect according to the current set value. Processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM is performed, and the setting suggestion B (for example, the background image of the end screen) described later is displayed.

<Point display / summary in deprecated bet number game>
Next, the outline of the point display in the deprecated bet number game will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

The game console (in this example, the slot machine) according to the present embodiment has a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (in this example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 84A or the like) and a plurality of types. A control means (in this example, a main control unit, a first sub-control unit, etc.) for shifting to any one of the states is provided.

One of the plurality of types of displays is a counter display related to the player's advantage. As an example of this counter display, for example, in addition to the cumulative point display TP showing the cumulative number of points acquired by the player shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (B), items and game media acquired by the player can be used. Examples include a count display indicating the number, a count display indicating the number of times a bonus or a winning combination has been won, a count display indicating the number of additional ATs, and a count display indicating the number of remaining games in the AT.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a display indicating the amount of change in the counter display in a certain game. As an example of this certain display, for example, in addition to the point giving display GP1 and GP2 showing the number of points given in the game shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (B), the items given in the game and the like. Examples include a display showing the number of game media, a display showing the number of added ATs given in the game, and the like. In addition, a certain display is not limited to the display when the advantage increases, and may be the display when the advantage decreases, for example, a display indicating the number of points consumed in the game (for example, "-". It may be a display including a character display of "20 points") or the like.

Further, the plurality of types of states include a first state (in this example, the normal state shown in FIG. 84 (A)) and a second state (in this example, FIG. 84 (in this example)) in which the degree of change in the counter display is different. The specialization state shown in B) is included, and the certain display (the first certain display. In this example, the point-giving display GP1 shown in FIG. 84 (A)) and the second display in the first state are included. The certain display (second certain display. In this example, the point-giving display GP2 shown in FIG. 84 (B)) in the state of is different. Further, the second state is a state in which the degree of change in the counter display is larger than that in the first state (in this example, points are easily given).

As an example of the combination of the first state and the second state, in addition to the normal state and the specialized state (the state where points are more easily given than the normal state), the normal game state and the judge state (normal game) in the high navigation state. A state in which the number of AT additional games is more likely to be given than in the state), a normal state and a bonus game state (a state in which a game medium is easier to acquire than the normal state), and a normal state and a re-game high probability state (re-play than the normal state). A state in which it is easy to win a prize in a game role), a low navigation state and a high navigation state (a state in which navigation is more likely to appear than in a low navigation state), and the like.

Further, in the game console (slot machine in this example) according to the present embodiment, the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (three in this example), the first game (three in this example). A betting game) and a second game (in this example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (two in this example) different from the first number can be executed. The first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

FIG. 84 (A) is a time-series diagram showing an example in which a two-card bet game is played after a three-card bet game is played in a normal state, and FIG. 84 (B) is a diagram showing a three-card bet game in a specialized state. It is a figure which showed the example which performed the two-card betting game after playing a game in chronological order.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 84 (A) (1) to (A) (3), a three-card betting game (first game) is started in the normal state (first state). When a predetermined point (20 points in this example) is given in the game, the point giving display GP1 (the first certain display) suggesting the number of points given in the game is triggered by the third stop operation. In this example, the display of the image including the character "+20") is started.

In addition, since points were awarded in the game, the cumulative point display TP indicating the cumulative number of points acquired by the player was changed from "200/1000 pt" to "220/1000 pt" in the wake of the third stop operation. I'm updating. In this example, when the cumulative number of points earned by the player reaches 1000 points, the privilege of shifting to the CZ (chance zone), which has a high expectation of shifting to AT games, or making it easier to shift to AT games. (Items, etc.) are configured to be given by lottery.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (B) to (B) (3), a three-card betting game (first game) is started in the specialized state (second state), and a predetermined game is set in the game. When points (20 points in this example) are given, the point giving display GP2 (a second display in this example, which suggests the number of points given in the game) is triggered by the third stop operation. , Displaying an image in which the characters "+20" are surrounded by a square) is started.

In addition, since one game in the specialized state has been digested in the game, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state, triggered by the third stop operation, and the rest of the specialized state is used. The remaining game number display DP showing the number of games has been updated from "4G left" to "3G left".

Here, in the specialized state, points are more likely to be given than in the normal state, and the cumulative number of points is more likely to reach the target value (1000 in this example). The second certain display) is a display that stands out more than the point-giving display GP1 (the first certain display) in the normal state. The point grant display GP1 (first certain display) and the point grant display GP2 (second certain display) may be different displays, for example, one is a blinking display and the other is a non-blinking display. Alternatively, one, a plurality, or all of the shapes, colors, sizes, and patterns may be displayed differently.

Further, the game console (in this example, the slot machine) according to the present embodiment has a second game (in this example) in a state where a certain first display (in this example, the point grant display GP1) is displayed. When the execution of the two-card betting game is started, the first certain display is configured so as not to be displayed after the second game is completed, and the second certain display (book) is displayed. In the example, when the execution of the second game is started while the point grant display GP2) is displayed, the second display is displayed after the second game is completed. It is configured as follows.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (3), as shown in FIGS. When the execution of the two-card betting game (second game) is started as the next game, as shown in FIGS. (A) and (5), after the second game is completed (third). After the stop operation), the point grant display GP1 (the first certain display) is configured not to be displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (B) and (3), in a state where the point grant display GP2 (a second display) is displayed, as shown in FIGS. (B) and (4), the next time. When the execution of the two-card betting game (second game) is started as a game, as shown in FIGS. (B) and (5) of the same figure, after the second game is completed (after the third stop operation). ), The point grant display GP2 (a second display) is configured to be displayed.

In the three-card betting game (first game) described with reference to FIGS. 84 (B) (1) to (B) (3), one game in the specialized state is digested, so that the first game is used. 3 With the stop operation as an opportunity, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state, and the remaining game number display DP indicating the number of remaining games in the specialized state is changed from "4G left" to "3G left". However, when a two-card betting game (second game), which is a non-recommended betting number game, is executed, the count value of the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state is not updated. The remaining game number display DP showing the count value is also configured not to be updated.

Further, in this example, when a two-card betting game (second game), which is a deprecated betting number game, is executed, it is shown in FIGS. 84 (A) (4) and 84 (B) (4). As described above, the warning display CD (in this example, the display including the character display of "during a two-card bet game") indicating that the deprecated bet number game has been executed is configured to start. It should be noted that such a warning display is not limited to that displayed in a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. For example, if the warning display is performed using all the display areas, the player is warned. The arousal can be performed more reliably.

FIG. 84 (C) is a diagram showing an example in which a three-card betting game is performed in a specialized state in chronological order, and FIG. 84 (D) is an example in which a two-card betting game is performed in the specialized state. It is a figure shown in a series.

In this example, the display means is a means capable of displaying an operation navigation, and the control means is a means capable of executing control to shift to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state. The advantageous state is a state more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state, and the second state is one state included in the advantageous state, and the first state regarding the advantageous state. (For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the counter that manages the number of games in the specialized state) is provided, and the first counter is played every time one game is played in the advantageous state. The count value of the counter (hereinafter referred to as “first count value”) can be updated, and for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the first game (for example, the first game) in the advantageous state. When the execution of the three-card betting game) is started, both the first count value and the count value related to the count display (for example, the cumulative point display TP shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B). Is configured to be updated, and when the execution of the second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value is updated. The count value related to the count display is configured not to be updated.

Further, in this example, the advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to any of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state. It is a state and includes a second counter (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D)) relating to the certain advantageous gaming state, and each time one game is played in the certain advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. A display including an image (hereinafter referred to as “first display”; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is It is a display including an image showing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), and the certain value is. It is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), when the execution of the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) is started in the certain advantageous gaming state. Is configured such that the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, for example, FIG. 84 ( As shown in D), when the execution of the second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is started in the certain advantageous gaming state, the first count value and the second count value are started. Of these, only the first count value is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game.

<Point display / specific example in deprecated bet number game>
Next, a specific example of the point display in the deprecated bet number game will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 86.

<Point display in deprecated bet number game / 3 bet game in normal state>
FIG. 85 (A) is a diagram showing an example in which a three-card betting game is performed in a normal state in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 85 (A) and 85 (2) is a state in which three medals are bet in the normal state, and then the three-card betting game is started triggered by the pressing operation of the start lever. In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used as a trigger for pressing the start lever to continue displaying the cumulative point display TP "200/1000 pt" of the previous game.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 85 (A) (3) to (A) (6), the cumulative point display TP is updated and displayed after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, triggered by the third stop operation. Is in the started state. In this example, since 20 points were given in the game, the cumulative point display TP is changed from "200/1000 pt" shown in FIGS. (A) and (4) to the same figure (A) with the third stop operation as an opportunity. ) The update display for updating to "220/1000 pt" shown in (6) has started.

In this example, as the cumulative point display, an example of displaying the cumulative number of points after addition (220 in this example) and the target value of the cumulative number of points (1000 in this example) is shown. The number of points (for example, 780 (= 1000-220)) obtained by subtracting the accumulated points from the target value of the accumulated points may be displayed without limitation.

The following states shown in FIGS. 85 (A) and 85 (7) are states in which the point grant display GP1 is started with the end of the update display of the cumulative point display TP. In this example, since 20 points were given in the game, the point giving display GP1 suggesting the number of points given in the game (the first certain display. In this example, the image including the character "+20"). Display) has started.

The following state shown in FIGS. 85 (A) and 85 (9) is a state in which the next three-card betting game is started by the operation of pressing the start lever after three medals have been bet. In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to continue displaying the cumulative point display TP "220/1000 pt" of the previous game and the point granting display GP1 of the previous game.

The following states shown in FIGS. 85 (A) (10) to (A) (12) are the update display of the point grant display GP1 triggered by the third stop operation after the first stop operation and the second stop operation. Is in the started state. In this example, since the points are not given in the game, the display (fade-out display) in which the point giving display GP1 is gradually erased is started with the third stop operation as an opportunity.

In this example, after the point grant display GP1 is displayed from the previous game to the game, the update display of the point grant display GP1 is started (in this example, the fade-out display is displayed) triggered by the third stop operation in the next game. Although the example of starting) is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the fade-out display of the point grant display GP1 may be started triggered by the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the next game. , When a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the point grant display GP1 was started in the previous game, the fade-out display of the point grant display GP1 may be started.

Further, after starting the display of the point grant display GP1 in the previous game, the display of the point grant display GP1 may be continued at least until the pressing operation of the start lever is accepted in the next game. Further, the method of erasing the point grant display GP1 is not limited to the fade-out display, and may be a mode of simply erasing the display.

<Point display in deprecated bet number game / 3 bet game in specialized state>
FIG. 85B is a diagram showing an example in which a three-card betting game is performed in a specialized state in chronological order.

The state shown in FIGS. 85 (B) and 85 (2) is a state in which three medals are bet in the specialized state, and then the three-card betting game is started triggered by the pressing operation of the start lever. In this example, since the transition from the normal state to the specialized state (a state in which points are more likely to be given than in the normal state), the liquid crystal display device 157 is used as a trigger for pressing the start lever to be in the specialized state. Specialized state suggestion effect (in this example, increased PT suggestion effect A) that suggests that, and special state suggestion display that suggests that it is a specialized state (in this example, the character display of "PT specialization zone"). Display including) has started.

Further, in this example, since the transition from the normal state to the specialized state is performed, the cumulative point display TP is changed from "200/1000 pt" shown in FIGS. In addition to changing to the cumulative point display TP2 (display including the character display of "200" in this example) shown in FIGS. (B) and (2), the remaining game number display DP (book) indicating the number of remaining games in the specialized state. In the example, the display including the character display of "remaining 4G") is started.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 85 (B) (3) to (B) (7), the point grant display GP2 is started with the third stop operation as an opportunity after the first stop operation and the second stop operation. At the same time, the update display of the cumulative point display TP2 has started.

In this example, since 20 points were given in the game, the point giving display GP2 (a second display in this example) suggesting the number of points given in the game triggered by the third stop operation. The display of the image in which the characters "+20" are surrounded by a square) is started, overlapped with the specialized state suggestion effect (in this example, the increase PT suggestion effect A), and the cumulative point display TP2 is shown in the same figure (in this example). B) The update display for updating from "200" shown in (4) to "220" shown in FIGS. (B) and (7) has started.

The following state shown in FIGS. 85 (B) and 85 (9) is a state in which the next three-card betting game is started by the operation of pressing the start lever after three medals have been bet. In this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to continue the display of the cumulative point display TP2 "220" of the previous game, while the display of the point grant display GP2 of the previous game is erased, and a new specialization state suggestion effect is produced. (In this example, the increased PT suggestion effect C) has started. The specialization state suggestion effect (increased PT suggestion effect C) of this example also functions as an effect suggesting that 50 points have been given in the game.

According to this example, in order to erase the display of the point grant display GP2 of the previous game and start a new specialization state suggestion effect (increased PT suggestion effect C), the player decides to shift to a new specialization state. Can be clearly informed.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 85 (B) (10) to (B) (13), the point grant display GP2 is started with the third stop operation as an opportunity after the first stop operation and the second stop operation. At the same time, the update display of the cumulative point display TP2 has started.

In this example, since 50 points were given in the game, the point giving display GP2 (a second display in this example) suggesting the number of points given in the game triggered by the third stop operation. The display of the image in which the characters "+50" are surrounded by a square) is started, overlapped with the specialized state suggestion effect (in this example, the increase PT suggestion effect C), and the cumulative point display TP2 is shown in the same figure (in this example). B) The update display for updating from "220" shown in (11) to "270" shown in FIGS. (B) and (13) has started.

<Point display in deprecated bet number game / 3 bet game → 2 bet game>
FIG. 86 (A) is a diagram showing an example in which a two-card betting game is played after a three-card betting game is played in a normal state in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. (A) and (8) are the same as those in FIGS. 85 (A) and 85 (8), and the point grant display GP1 and the cumulative point display TP are performed in the three-card betting game in the normal state. Is.

In the following state shown in FIGS. 86 (A) and 86 (1), in the state where the point grant display GP1 (the first certain display) is displayed in the previous three-card betting game, the two-card betting game (the next game) The execution of the second game) has started.

In this example, it is not recommended because the two-card betting game (second game), which is a non-recommended betting number game, is executed while the point grant display GP1 (a certain first display) is displayed. While the warning display CD suggesting that the bet number game has been executed has been started, the point grant display GP1 (the first certain display) is not displayed.

It should be noted that such a warning display is not limited to that displayed in a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. For example, if the warning display is performed using all the display areas, the player is warned. The arousal can be performed more reliably.

Further, the method of not displaying the point grant display GP1 (the first certain display) in the two-card betting game (second game) is not particularly limited, and for example, the point grant display GP1 (the first certain display) is displayed. By overlapping at least a part of the caution display, the point grant display GP1 (the first certain display) may be invisible (or difficult to see) from the front, and the display may be displayed in the previous three-card betting game. The point granting display GP1 (the first certain display) that has started may be deleted after a lapse of a predetermined time. Further, at least during the period when the warning display is displayed, the point grant display GP1 (the first certain display) may be configured not to be displayed.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 86 (A) (2) to (A) (4), the warning display CD was erased after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, triggered by the third stop operation. It is a state. In this example, the warning display CD is erased triggered by the third stop operation, but the warning display CD may be erased triggered by the first stop operation or the second stop operation.

FIG. 86B is a diagram showing an example in which a two-card betting game is played after a three-card betting game is played in a specialized state in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. (B) and (8) are the same as those in FIGS. 85 (B) and (8), and the point grant display GP2 and the cumulative point display TP2 are performed in the three-card betting game in the specialized state. It is a state.

In this example, it is not recommended because the two-card betting game (second game), which is a non-recommended betting number game, is executed while the point grant display GP2 (a second certain display) is displayed. A warning display CD suggesting that the bet number game has been executed has been started.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 86 (B) (2) to (B) (4), the warning display CD is erased after the first stop operation and the second stop operation, triggered by the third stop operation. On the other hand, it is a state in which the point grant display GP2 (a second display) has been started.

In this example, in the state where the point grant display GP2 (a second certain display) is displayed, the two-card betting game (second game), which is a deprecated betting number game, is executed, and the third stop operation is performed. Since the game is completed, the point grant display GP2 (a second display) is displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to grasp the latest gaming state (in this example, the normal state or the specialized state) based on the display mode of a certain display, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

FIG. 86 (C) is a diagram showing an example of production in chronological order when a three-card betting game is played in a specialized state and the cumulative number of points reaches a target value.

The states shown in FIGS. 86 (C) (1) to (C) (4) are states in which the update display of the cumulative point display TP2 is started with the third stop operation as a trigger. In this example, since 20 points were given in the game, the point giving display GP2 (a second display in this example) suggesting the number of points given in the game triggered by the third stop operation. The display of the image in which the characters "+20" are surrounded by a square) is started, overlapped with the specialized state suggestion effect (in this example, the increase PT suggestion effect A), and the cumulative point display TP2 is shown in the same figure (in this example). C) The update display for updating from "990" shown in (1) to "1010" shown in FIGS. (C) and (4) has been started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 86 (C) and 86 (5) indicate a CZ effect (in this example, " It is in the state where the production including the character display of "CZ rush !!") has started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 86 (C) and 86 (6) are states in which the next three-card betting game is started by the operation of pressing the start lever after three medals have been bet. In this example, since the cumulative number of points reached the target value (1000 in this example) in the previous game, the game has shifted to the CZ state.

FIG. 86 (D) is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in a normal state in chronological order, and FIG. 86 (E) is a diagram showing an example of changes in various counters in a specialized state in chronological order. Is.

As described above, the specialized state is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. For example, in this example, the number of CZ transition counters in the specialized state is likely to increase more than that of the CZ transition counter in the normal state. That is, it is configured so as to easily shift to a CZ state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in this example, when the execution of the first game (three-card betting game) is started in the normal state or the specialized state, both the count value of the high navigation state counter and the count value of the ceiling G number counter are both. While the count value of is updated, when the execution of the second game (two-card betting game) is started in the normal state or the specialized state, the count value of the high navigation state counter and the ceiling G number counter Of the count values, only the count value of the high navigation state counter is configured to be updated.

As described above, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment is one of a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays and a plurality of types of states. A game table provided with a control means (for example, a main control unit, a first sub-control unit, etc.) for shifting to a state, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed at the player's advantage. It is a related counter display (for example, the cumulative point display TP shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (B)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a certain game (for example, a plurality of games). A display indicating the amount of change in the counter display in one game or two or more games out of a plurality of games), and the plurality of types of states are the first states in which the degree of change in the counter display is different. (For example, a normal state) and a second state (for example, a specialized state) are included, and the certain display in the first state (hereinafter, referred to as “the first certain display”) is referred to as, for example, FIG. 84 (. The point-giving display GP1) shown in A) and the certain display in the second state (hereinafter referred to as "second certain display"; for example, the point-giving display GP2 shown in FIG. 84B) are different. It is a game table characterized by displaying (for example, different display modes, different display positions, etc.).

According to the game table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the latest game state based on the display mode of a certain display, and it is possible to give a sense of security to the player.

In addition, the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (3 in this example), the first game (in this example, the bet on 3), and the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (3). In the example, the second game (two-card betting game in this example) is playable, and the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the second number is different. The first game is more advantageous to the player than the first game, and the execution of the second game is started in the state where the first certain display is displayed (certain). In the case, the first is configured so that the first certain display is not displayed after the second game is completed, and the second certain display is displayed (some) in the second certain display. When the execution of the second game is started, it may be configured so that a certain display of the second game is displayed after the second game is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the latest gaming state based on whether or not a certain display is displayed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

Further, the first state is a state in which the counter display may or may not change when the first game is performed, and the second state is the first game. May be in a state where the counter display always changes when the above is performed.

Conventionally, in an advantageous state where the amount of change in points is large, the player pays attention to how many points have changed, and there is a risk that the amount of change in points cannot be confirmed if a two-card bet game is played in a hurry after the previous result display. was there. However, according to the game console according to the present embodiment, the player who has already played a disadvantageous two-card betting game can be shown the previous result display in an advantageous state. You can maintain your motivation to play. On the contrary, in a non-advantageous state where the amount of point change is small, the player does not pay attention to how many points have changed, and for example, whether the player shifts to an advantageous state where the amount of point change is large, or the strength regarding CZ or AT transition. Since we are paying attention to whether or not the effect is generated, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding by not displaying the result display.

Further, the second state may be a state in which the degree of change in the counter display is larger than that in the first state (for example, a state in which points are easily given).

With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play a disadvantageous two-card betting game can be further sustained.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the operation navigation, and the control means is a means capable of executing control to shift to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state. The advantageous state is a state more advantageous for the display of the operation navigation than the normal state, and the second state (or / and the first state) is one state included in the advantageous state. There is a first counter for the advantageous state (for example, a first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), a counter for managing the number of games in the specialized state), and one game is provided in the advantageous state. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) can be updated each time it is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the advantageous state is described. When the execution of the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) is started, the first count value and the count display (for example, the cumulative points shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (B)) are started. When both count values of the count values with respect to the display TP) are configured to be updated and the execution of the second game (for example, a two-card betting game) is started in the advantageous state, the first game is started. Only the count value of the above may be updated, and the count value related to the count display may not be updated.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first of the first count value and the count value related to the count display is started. Since only the count value of is updated, it is possible to notify the player that the second game has been performed in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state. A second counter for the advantageous gaming state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D)) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous gaming state, the second counter is provided. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updatable, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image showing a certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “first display”. For example, the first display d1 shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the above-mentioned certain value. It is a display including an image showing the updated value of (hereinafter referred to as “second display”; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), and the certain value is the second display. It is a value related to the count value, and when the execution of the first game is started in the certain advantageous gaming state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the execution of the second game (for example, in the certain advantageous game state). When the two-card betting game) is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and in the second game, the second count value is updated. It may be configured so that the display is not displayed.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first of the first count value and the second count value is started. Since only the count value of is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is performed. It is possible to notify the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started in the state where the first certain display is displayed, the specific display (for example, the caution display shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (B)) is displayed. CD) is configured to be startable, and when the execution of the first game is started in a state where the second display is displayed, the specific display is not started. It may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, has started.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started in the state where the first certain display is displayed, the first certain display is not displayed after the second game is completed. One of the plurality of types of displays is configured as described above, and the display indicates a cumulative amount that is accumulated based on the execution of the game (hereinafter, referred to as a “third display”, for example, FIG. 84 (A), (B) is the cumulative point display TP), and when the execution of the first game is started, the second display is displayed after the first game is completed. When the display is displayed, the third display is configured to be updated, and the execution of the second game is started while the second display is displayed, the second game is displayed. The second display may be displayed after the second game is completed, and the third display may be configured not to be updated.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the display showing the cumulative amount is not updated, so that the player's misunderstanding regarding the cumulative amount is made. It can be prevented in advance.

Further, when the execution of the first game is started while the first display is displayed, the time when the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the first game is completed. When the execution of the first game is started in the state where the first certain display is displayed and the second certain display is displayed, the first It may be configured so that a certain second display is not displayed at the time when the first stop operation or the second stop operation in the game is completed.

Further, the first certain display may be a display that does not change for each game, and the second certain display may be a display that changes for each game. Further, the first state may be a game that is more advantageous to the player than the second state, or may be a game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state. Further, in the first state and the second state, after the display of the certain display (for example, the point giving display GP1 shown in FIG. 84 (A)) is started, the count display (for example, FIG. 84) is started. The time until the display of the cumulative point display TP) shown in (A) and (B) is started may be different.

<Suggestion of setting / summary in deprecated bet number game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the outline of the setting suggestion in the deprecated bet number game will be described.

The game console (in this example, the slot machine) according to the present embodiment has a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (in this example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 84A or the like) and a plurality of types. A set value setting means (in this example, a main control unit or the like) capable of setting any one of the set values is provided.

One of the plurality of types of displays is a first type of display (first display) that suggests the set value that has been set. As an example of this first display, for example, in addition to the setting suggestion A suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine shown in FIG. 87 (A), the setting value is an even number (or an odd number). A display suggesting, a display suggesting that the set value is larger (or smaller) than a certain set value, or a display suggesting other game information together with the set value (for example, an AT suggesting that the AT game ends). Display of the end screen, display of the ED (ending) end screen), and the like.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a second type of display (second display) that suggests a set value. As an example of this second display, for example, in addition to the setting suggestion B suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine shown in FIG. 87 (A), the setting value is an even number (or an odd number). A display suggesting, a display suggesting that the set value is larger (or smaller) than a certain set value, or a display suggesting other game information together with the set value (for example, an AT suggesting that the AT game ends). Display of the end screen, display of the ED (ending) end screen), and the like.

Further, in the game console (slot machine in this example) according to the present embodiment, the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (three in this example), the first game (three in this example). A betting game) and a second game (in this example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (two in this example) different from the first number can be executed. The first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

Further, the game console (in this example, the slot machine) according to the present embodiment has a first display (in this example, FIG. 87) in relation to the execution of the first game (in this example, a three-card betting game). The setting suggestion A shown in (A) is configured so that the display can be started, and the first display (in this example, FIG. 87 (A)) is related to the execution of the second game (two-card betting game in this example). ) Is configured so that the setting suggestion A) is not started to be displayed.

87 (A) (1) to (A) (2) are diagrams showing an example in which the setting suggestion A is started to be displayed in connection with the execution of the three-card betting game in chronological order. (B) (1) to (B) (2) are diagrams showing an example in which the setting suggestion A is not started to be displayed in relation to the execution of the two-card betting game in chronological order.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (A) (1) to (A) (2), when a three-card betting game (first game) is started, a game start operation (in this example). , The start lever is pressed) to start the setting suggestion A (first display), and this setting suggestion A (first display) is displayed until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game. continue.

On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (B) (1) to (B) (2), when the two-card betting game (second game) is started, the game start operation (book). In the example, the warning display CD suggesting that the deprecated bet number game has been executed is started triggered by the pressing operation of the start lever), but in the game, the setting suggestion A (first display) is displayed. Never start.

The first display is preferably a display that does not end with the passage of time. For example, the display starts when the bet button is pressed, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, or the like. After that, the display may be continued even if the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation, the payout operation of the game medium, and the like are performed.

Further, the game console (in this example, the slot machine) according to the present embodiment has a second display (in this example, FIG. 87) related to the execution of the first game (in this example, a three-card betting game). The setting suggestion B shown in (A) can be started to be displayed, and the second display (setting suggestion B) can be started to be displayed in connection with the execution of the second game (in this example, the two-card betting game). It is composed of.

87 (A) (3) to (A) (4) are diagrams showing an example in which the setting suggestion B is started to be displayed in connection with the execution of the three-card betting game in chronological order. (B) (3) to (B) (4) are diagrams showing an example in which the setting suggestion B is started to be displayed in connection with the execution of the two-card betting game in chronological order.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (A) (3) to 87 (A) (4), when a three-card betting game (first game) is started, or in FIG. 87 (B) ( 3) -As shown in FIGS. (B) and (4), when the two-card betting game (second game) is started, the setting suggestion B (second display) is triggered by the third stop operation. To start.

The second display is preferably a display that ends with the passage of time. For example, the display is started when the bet button is pressed, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, or the like, and then the display is started. The display ends when the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation, the game medium payout operation, the bet button pressing operation, the start lever pressing operation, etc. in the next game are triggered. May be good.

In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed depending on the game result of the game (for example, whether or not a specific winning combination has been won, whether or not a lottery has been won, etc.) in a certain state. May be displayed.

FIG. 87 (C) is a diagram showing an example in which a three-card betting game is performed in a high navigation state in chronological order, and FIG. 87 (D) is an example in which a two-card betting game is performed in a high navigation state. It is a figure shown in a series.

In this example, a control means (for example, a main control unit, a first sub) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, a low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state). A control unit, etc.) is provided, and a first counter for the advantageous state (for example, a first counter shown in FIGS. 87 (C) and 87 (D), a counter for managing the number of games played in high navigation) is provided, and the advantageous state is provided. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the above-mentioned advantageous state. It is configured so that it can be transferred to any one of them, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous state. (For example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 87 (C) and 87 (D), the counter that manages the number of games in the AT2 state) is provided, and one game is played in the first advantageous state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated, and one of the plurality of types of displays indicates a certain value. A display including an image (hereinafter referred to as “third display”; for example, the third display d3 shown in FIGS. 87 (C) and 87 (D)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is A display including an image showing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”; for example, the fourth display d4 shown in FIGS. 87 (C) and 87 (D)). The value is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first value is displayed. When the execution of the game (for example, a three-card betting game) is started, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the fourth in the first game. Is displayable, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the second game (for example, the second game) is displayed. When the execution of the two-card betting game) is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and in the second game, the first count value is updated. It is configured so that the display of four is not displayed.

<Suggestion of setting in deprecated bet number game / specific example>
Next, a specific example of setting suggestion in the deprecated bet number game will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 89.

FIG. 88 (A) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which a setting suggestion is performed triggered by a game start operation in a game in which the judge (AT1) has transitioned to AT2.

The states shown in FIGS. 88 (A) (2) to (A) (3) are states in which the judge (AT1) has executed a three-card betting game and the transition to AT2 has been decided. In this example, a three-card betting game (first game) is started in the judge (AT1), and the transition to AT2 is decided in the game, so that the transition to AT2 is suggested with the third stop operation as an opportunity. The production (in this example, the display of the victory screen) is started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 88 (A) (4) to (A) (6) are states in which a three-card betting game is executed in the next game in which the judge (AT1) has transitioned to AT2. In this example, when a three-card betting game (first game) is started, AT2 start suggesting a set value triggered by a game start operation (in this example, a start lever pressing operation). The display of the screen 1 (first display) is started, and the display of the AT2 start screen 1 (first display) is continued until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game.

FIG. 88B is a time-series diagram showing an example in which a setting suggestion is performed triggered by a game start operation in a game in which the judge (AT1) has finished.

The states shown in FIGS. 88 (B) (2) to (B) (3) are states in which the judge (AT1) has executed a three-card betting game and the end of the judge (AT1) has been determined. In this example, since it is determined that the judge (AT1) starts the three-card betting game (first game), the judge (AT1) ends in the game, and the game does not shift to AT2, the third stop operation is performed. As an opportunity, the production suggesting the end of the judge (AT1) (in this example, the display of the defeat screen) has started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 88 (B) (4) to (B) (6) are states in which a three-card betting game is executed in the next game in which the judge (AT1) has finished. In this example, when a three-card betting game (first game) is started, the judge ends suggesting the set value triggered by the game start operation (in this example, the start lever pressing operation). The display of the screen 1 (first display) is started, and the display of the judge end screen 1 (first display) is continued until at least the third stop operation is performed in the game.

FIG. 88C is a time-series diagram showing an example in which a three-card betting game is executed in the final game of AT2, and then a setting suggestion is made in the next three-card betting game triggered by the third stop operation. ..

The states shown in FIGS. 88 (C) (2) to (C) (3) are states in which a three-card betting game is executed in the final game of AT2 and AT2 is completed, and the following FIGS. 88 (C) ( 4) -The states shown in FIGS. (C) and (6) are states in which a three-card betting game is executed in the next game in which AT2 is completed.

In this example, when a three-card betting game (first game) is started in the next game in which AT2 is finished, the end of AT2 is triggered by a game start operation (in this example, a start lever pressing operation). After starting the display of the AT2 end screen suggesting, the display of the image 1 (second display) suggesting the set value is started with the third stop operation as an opportunity, and at least the bet button of the next game is started. The display of this image 1 (second display) is continued until the pressing operation of is performed.

The trigger for starting the display of the image 1 (second display) is not limited to the third stop operation, and for example, as shown in FIGS. 005 (D) (4), the AT2 end screen suggesting the end of AT2. After starting the display of, as shown in FIGS. (D) and (6), the image 1 (second) suggesting the set value is triggered by the pressing operation of the effect button after the third stop operation. Display) may be started, and the display of the image 1 (second display) may be continued until at least the next operation of pressing the bet button of the game is performed.

FIG. 89A is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which the setting suggestion is not performed while the victory screen of the judge (AT1) is displayed.

The states shown in FIGS. 89 (A) (2) to (A) (3) are states in which the judge (AT1) has executed a three-card betting game and the transition to AT2 has been decided. In this example, a three-card betting game (first game) is started in the judge (AT1), and the transition to AT2 is decided in the game, so that the transition to AT2 is suggested with the third stop operation as an opportunity. The production (in this example, the display of the victory screen) is started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 89 (A) (4) to (A) (6) will be used in the next game in which the effect suggesting the transition to AT2 (in this example, the display of the victory screen) is continued. It is a state in which a two-card betting game (second game) is executed.

In this example, when the two-card betting game (second game) is started, the deprecated betting number game is executed triggered by the game start operation (in this example, the start lever pressing operation). While the display of the suggestion alert display CD is started, the display of the AT2 start screen 1 (first display) described with reference to FIGS. 005 (A) and 005 (4) is not started in the game. ing.

FIG. 89B is a time-series diagram showing an example in which the setting suggestion is not performed while the defeat screen of the judge (AT1) is displayed.

The states shown in FIGS. 89 (B) (2) to (B) (3) are states in which the judge (AT1) has executed a three-card betting game and the judge (AT1) has finished. In this example, since it is determined that the judge (AT1) starts the three-card betting game (first game), the judge (AT1) ends in the game, and the game does not shift to AT2, the third stop operation is performed. As an opportunity, the production suggesting the end of the judge (AT1) (in this example, the display of the defeat screen) has started.

The following states shown in FIGS. 89 (B) (4) to (B) (6) continue the next production (in this example, the display of the defeat screen) suggesting the end of the judge (AT1). It is a state in which a two-card betting game (second game) is executed in the game.

In this example, when the two-card betting game (second game) is started, the deprecated betting number game is executed triggered by the game start operation (in this example, the start lever pressing operation). While the display of the suggestion alert display CD is started, the display of the judge end screen 1 (first display) described with reference to FIGS. 005 (B) and 005 (4) is not started in the game. ing.

According to this example, while giving preferential treatment to a player who is playing in the first game (recommended betting game which is advantageous to the player), he is playing in the second game (deprecated betting game which is disadvantageous to the player). By not displaying the first display, it is possible to notify the player who is playing the second game in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

FIG. 89C is a time-series diagram showing an example in which a three-card betting game is executed in the final game of AT2, and then a setting suggestion is made in the next two-card betting game triggered by the third stop operation. ..

In the states shown in FIGS. 89 (C) (2) to (C) (3), a three-card betting game is executed in the final game of AT2, followed by FIGS. 89 (C) (4) to (C). The state shown in (6) is a state in which AT2 is continued because the two-card betting game is executed in the next game.

In this example, when a two-card betting game (second game) is started in the next game of the final game of AT2, the game start operation (in this example, the start lever pressing operation) is used as a trigger for AT2. After starting the display of the AT-time effect suggesting continuation, the display of the image 1 (second display) suggesting the set value is started with the third stop operation as an opportunity, and at least the bet of the next game is bet. The display of this image 1 (second display) is continued until the button is pressed.

It should be noted that the image 1 (second display) is any of the three-card betting game (first game) and the two-card betting game (second game). The display may or may not be displayed depending on the game result.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 006 (D) and (5), the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window after the third stop operation is the display result 2 (second symbol combination, for example, the symbol corresponding to the loss. In the case of (combination), image 1 (second display) is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 006 (C) and (5), the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window after the third stop operation is displayed. In the case of the result 1 (first symbol combination; for example, the symbol combination corresponding to a certain winning combination), the image 1 (second display) may be configured to be displayed.

<Predetermined number acquisition display (setting suggestion display)>
Next, the predetermined number acquisition display (setting suggestion display) will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 (A) and 90 (B). FIG. 90A is a diagram showing an example of a predetermined number acquisition display (setting suggestion display), and FIG. 90B is a diagram showing an example of a predetermined number acquisition display lottery table.

The first sub control unit is based on the AT2 planned acquisition number information (count value of the AT2 planned acquisition number counter) and the AT2 acquisition number information (count value of the AT2 acquisition number counter) received from the main control unit. Update the count value of the display counter.

Then, at the end of one game, referring to the predetermined number acquisition display lottery table shown in FIG. 90 (B), the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number (the count value of the total number of acquisition display counter reaches a certain value). ), And when the current effect state is the AT2 state (or the LMT state), the predetermined number acquisition display is determined based on the count value of the total acquisition number display counter.

The condition for determining the predetermined number of acquired sheets is not limited to this example, and for example, when the total acquired number of sheets reaches the predetermined number of sheets regardless of the effect state (the count value of the total acquired number of sheets display counter is a certain value). When (is reached), the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display may be determined.

For example, if it is determined that the total number of acquired cards has reached 135, it means that the number of cards reached 135 has a probability of 2/100 when the set value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). The suggested predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (for example, display including the character string of "135 sheets exceeded") is performed, and when the set value is an even number, the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 135 is displayed, it is determined that the set value is an odd number (setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). Therefore, the display can be said to be a setting suggestion display (display of an odd number setting suggestion) suggesting that the set value is an odd number.

Further, when it is determined that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 246, it is determined that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 246 with a probability of 2/100 when the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). The suggested predetermined number of sheets acquisition display (for example, display including the character string of "246 sheets exceeded") is performed, and when the set value is an odd number, the predetermined number of sheets acquisition display is not displayed. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 246 is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is an even number (setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). Therefore, the display can be said to be a setting suggestion display (display of even setting suggestion) suggesting that the set value is an even number.

Further, when it is determined that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 333, a predetermined number acquired display suggesting that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 333 with a probability of 3/100 when the set value is set 3 (for example, "" Display including the character string of "333 sheets exceeded") is performed, the same predetermined number of sheets is acquired and displayed with a probability of 2/100 when the set value is set 4, and 1 when the set value is set 5 or setting 6. The same predetermined number acquisition display is displayed with a probability of / 100, and the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed when the set value is other than that. Therefore, when the predetermined number acquisition display suggesting that the number of sheets has reached 333 is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is set 3 or more. Therefore, the display can be said to be a setting suggestion display (display of a setting 3 or more suggestion) suggesting that the set value is set 3 or more.

In the case where the total number of acquired sheets reaches 456, 555, and 666, the setting suggestion display (display of setting 4 or more suggestion) and the set value suggesting that the set value is set 4 or more, respectively, are also set values. Can be referred to as a setting suggestion suggestion display (display of setting 5 or more suggestion) and a setting suggestion display suggesting that the setting value is setting 6 (display of setting 6 suggestion).

Further, when it is determined that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 500, a predetermined number of acquired sheets indicating that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value (for example, "500 sheets exceeded"). When it is determined in step S2709 that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 1000, it is suggested that the total number of acquired sheets has reached 1000 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. A predetermined number of sheets to be acquired is displayed (for example, a display including a character string of "1000 sheets exceeded").

In the example shown in FIG. 90 (A), since the total number of acquired sheets reaches a predetermined number (500 sheets) and the effect state is the AT2 state, the total number of acquired sheets display counter is triggered by the third stop operation. A predetermined number of medals is determined based on the count value (500 in this example), and a predetermined number of medals suggesting that the number of acquired medals has reached 500 with a probability of 100/100 regardless of the set value. The acquisition display TG (in this example, the display including the character string "500 sheets exceeded") is performed.

FIG. 90C is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion display lottery table. In this example, the first sub-control unit refers to the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIG. 90 (C) at the end of the judge (AT1), and displays the judge end screen suggesting that the judge (AT1) ends. decide.

For example, when the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIGS. (C) and (1) is applied, the judge end screen 1 (setting suggestion display suggesting that the set value is an odd number) and the judge end screen 2 (setting). One judge end screen is decided by lottery etc. from the setting suggestion display suggesting that the value is an even number), the judge end screen 3 (setting suggestion display suggesting that the set value is other than setting 1), etc. Then, the judge end screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The content of the setting suggestion display lottery table is not limited to this example. For example, as in the setting suggestion display lottery table shown in FIGS. (C) and (2), the judge end screen 0 (setting) is used as the judge end screen. A display that does not suggest a value) may be added. Further, the trigger for starting the display of the setting suggestion display is not particularly limited, and for example, the setting suggestion display may be determined at the start of the judge (AT1) and the setting suggestion display may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The setting suggestion display may be started by an operation other than the stop operation.

As described above, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment is one of a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays and a plurality of types of set values. A game console equipped with a set value setting means (in this example, a main control unit or the like) capable of setting the set value of the above, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is set. A first type of display suggesting a set value (hereinafter referred to as "first display"; for example, in addition to the setting suggestion A shown in FIG. 87 (A), a predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 90 (A), The first game (in this example, 3 cards), which is a predetermined number of cards reached display (over 456 cards) shown in FIG. 90 (B), and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3 cards). A betting game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (in this example, a two-card betting game) can be executed, and the first number and the second The numbers (eg, two) are different numbers, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the game is related to the execution of the first game. The first display is configured to be display startable (or (always) configured to be displayed) and the first display is configured not to be displayed in connection with the execution of the second game. It is a game table characterized by the fact that it is.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the player who is playing in the first game (recommended betting game which is advantageous to the player) is given preferential treatment, while the second game (deprecated betting which is disadvantageous to the player) is given preferential treatment. For the player who is playing in the game), by not displaying the first display, it is possible to notify the player that the second game has been performed in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

Further, the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a second type of display suggesting the set value that has been set (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”, for example, in FIG. 87 (A)). The setting suggestion B) is shown, wherein the second display can be started to be displayed in connection with the execution of the first game, and the second display is displayed in connection with the execution of the second game. It may be configured to be startable.

With such a configuration, not only the player who is playing in the first game (recommended betting game which is advantageous to the player) but also the game in the second game (deprecated betting game which is disadvantageous to the player). It is possible to provide advantageous information to the gambling player.

Further, the first display may be a display in which the display does not end with the passage of time, and the second display may be a display in which the display ends with the passage of time.

With such a configuration, in the second game (a deprecated betting game that is disadvantageous to the player), the display ends with the passage of time, and the second game (to the player) is displayed. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that a player playing in a disadvantageous deprecated betting game) has.

Further, it is configured so that the execution of one game requires a plurality of operations, the plurality of operations includes a first operation and a second operation, and the first operation is the first operation. The operation performed before the second operation (the operation performed first of the plurality of operations, for example, the operation of pressing the start lever), and the second operation is the operation performed of the plurality of operations. This is the operation performed at the end of (for example, the third stop operation), and the first display is not started due to the second operation being performed, and the first operation is performed. The display can be started by, and the second display is a display that can be started by performing the second operation without starting the display by performing the first operation. You may.

With such a configuration, the player who has finished the second game (a deprecated betting game that is disadvantageous to the player) has a disappointment by starting the display of the second display in response to the second operation. Can be reduced.

In addition, since the bet button pressing operation is not required when the re-game combination is won, even if the "first operation" is defined as the bet button pressing operation, after the re-game combination is won. The first operation of the game corresponds to the pressing operation of the start lever.

Further, it is configured to require a plurality of operations to advance the game, and the plurality of operations include a first operation and a second operation, and the first display is the above-mentioned. A display that can be started when one of a plurality of operations (first operation, for example, a start lever pressing operation) is performed, and is a display of the first operation of the plurality of operations. The display does not end before the next operation is performed, and the second display is an operation different from the first operation among the plurality of operations (the first operation). A display that can be started when a second operation (for example, a third stop operation) is performed, and is displayed before the next operation of the second operation among the plurality of operations is performed. May be displayed that may end.

Further, an operating means (for example, a start lever, a stop button, and a bet button) provided at a position where the player can operate the game is provided, and the operation by the operating means can be performed a plurality of times from the start to the end of one game. The first display is started from at least the first operation (for example, the operation of pressing the bet button (or the start lever)) out of the plurality of operations of the operation means, and the first display is started from the first operation. It is a display in which the display may not be terminated before the operation different from the operation (for example, the third stop operation) is performed, and the second display is the first of the plurality of operations of the operation means. The display may be started at least from the second operation (for example, the third stop operation) and may be terminated before the operation performed after the second operation (for example, the operation of pressing the bet button of the next game). It may be a display.

With such a configuration, the disappointment of a player playing in the second game (a deprecated betting game that is disadvantageous to the player) can be quickly reduced.

Further, the variation (type) of the display mode of the first type display (first display) may be larger than the variation (type) of the display mode of the second type display (second display). ..

With such a configuration, the first type of display (first display) with many variations is shown only to the player who has performed the first game (recommended betting game advantageous to the player). Fairness can be guaranteed.

Further, the second display is not displayed when it is displayed depending on the game result of the game (for example, whether or not a specific winning combination has been won, whether or not a lottery has been won, etc.) in a certain state. The display may be in some cases. Further, the second display may be displayed when the game result of the game is the first result in a certain state, and the result of the game is the first result in the certain state. It may be a display that may not be displayed in the case of a different second result.

With such a configuration, the second display may be displayed depending on the game result in the second game (deprecated betting game that is disadvantageous to the player), so that the second game (disadvantageous to the player) is displayed. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that a player playing in a deprecated betting game) has.

Further, a control means (for example, a main control unit and a first sub-control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, a low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state). Etc.), and a first counter for the advantageous state (for example, a first counter shown in FIGS. 87 (C) and 87 (D), a counter for managing the number of games played in high navigation), and 1 in the advantageous state. The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated each time a game is played, and in the advantageous state, among a plurality of advantageous game states. It is configured so as to be transitionable to any one, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state), and the first advantageous state is related to the first advantageous state. A second counter (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 87 (C) and 87 (D), a counter for managing the number of games in the AT2 state) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous state, The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated, and one of the plurality of types of displays displays an image showing a certain value. Including the display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”; for example, the third display d3 shown in FIGS. 87 (C) and 87 (D)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the above or A display including an image showing the updated value of the value (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”; for example, the fourth display d4 shown in FIGS. 87 (C) and 87 (D)), and the above-mentioned certain value. Is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first game ( For example, when the execution of the three-card betting game) is started, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the fourth display is displayed in the first game. Is displayable, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), after the third display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the second game (for example, two cards) is displayed. When the execution of the betting game) is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and in the second game, the fourth count value is updated. It may be configured so that the display is not displayed.

With such a configuration, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the third of the third count value and the fourth count value is started. Since only the count value of is updated and the fourth display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the fourth count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is performed. It is possible to notify the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the third counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing.

Further, the second display may be a display in which the display can be started after the last operation of the plurality of operations is performed.

With such a configuration, the disappointment of a player playing in the second game (a deprecated betting game that is disadvantageous to the player) can be quickly reduced.

Further, it is more likely that the second display will be started in the second game in a certain state than the possibility that the second display will be started in the first game in a certain state. It may be low.

With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the motivation to play by displaying the second display even for the player who is playing in the second game (a deprecated betting game that is disadvantageous to the player). can.

Further, the first display is a display that can be started before the transition to a certain AT state, and the second display is a display that can be started after the transition to the certain AT state. It may be less likely to be displayed before the transition to the certain AT state than after the transition to the certain AT state.

Further, the display of the second display may be started while the first display is displayed, or the second display may be started while the first display is displayed. It is not necessary that the display of the display of is started. Further, the first display may be a display that is (always) displayed, and the second display may be a display that may be displayed (may not be displayed).

<Other embodiments>
Next, the game console according to another embodiment will be described.

The game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example, a high state). It is a game console equipped with a control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of the states (navigation state) and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. The operation information of the operation means can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, an operation navigation using a payout number display, a liquid crystal display. The operation navigation using the device is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation for the push order combination, and is a first counter for the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 84 (C)). , (D), the first counter, the high navigation state counter indicating the number of remaining games in the high navigation state), and the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, every time a game is played in the advantageous state). , "First count value") is updatable, and is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain termination condition is satisfied. The end condition is a condition that is satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). , The advantageous gaming state is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the advantageous gaming state). AT2), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIGS. 84 (C), D) relating to the first advantageous gaming state. ), A production state counter indicating the number of remaining games in the effect navigation state (AT1 state, AT2 state, LMT state, etc.) is provided, and each time a game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. , The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated, and a game in which the push order is not won in the first advantageous game state is performed. Even if the second count value is updatable, the first game (for example, a three-card bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and the game A second game in which the number of bets on the medium is the second number (For example, a two-card betting game) is feasible, and the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the second number is higher than the second game. One game is more advantageous to the player, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value and is the first. When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous gaming state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the second game is started. If so, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is a game table characterized by being.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are started. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game It is possible to notify the player that he / she was doing the above in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing.

Further, the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state is 0 (hereinafter, referred to as "third display"). Therefore, when the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display. ..

Further, even when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first display is not displayed and the first game is performed. The advantageous gaming state may end.

Further, the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the second advantageous gaming state, and the second advantageous gaming state is the operation different from the first advantageous gaming state. The third display is displayed when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous game state in which navigation can be executed. There may be a case where the first advantageous gaming state ends and the second advantageous gaming state starts without any notice.

Further, when the second count value reaches a predetermined value in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state may be terminated.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image relating to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display"). When the first game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. In addition, the fourth display may not be displayed.

Further, in a state where at least the first count value is updatable and the winning probability of the re-gaming combination capable of playing the game without inserting the game medium is higher than in the normal state, the first The winning probability of the re-gaming combination in the second game may be higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming combination in one game.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as "first count value"), and is advantageous when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied. It is configured to transition from the state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). It is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games after shifting to is reached the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states. The advantageous gaming state of one of the advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed. A second counter relating to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), an effect state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time, and the push order is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. Even when a game is played, the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) in which the second count value is updatable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number. And a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game). The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value and is the first. When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the second game is started. If so, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. A third counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state is provided, and one game is provided in the advantageous state. The count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as "third count value". For example, the difference number which is the difference between the game medium input by the player and the game medium acquired by the player is calculated each time. The difference number counter shown) is updatable, and the second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). The third count value can be updated based on the result of the game regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state. A setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays suggests the set value. A certain display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 87 (A)), and when the first game is performed in the advantageous state. Is configured so that the third display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed. In the first game, when the first game is executed after the second game is executed in the first advantageous game state. , A display relating to the number of game media acquired in the first advantageous gaming state based on the game results of both the second game and the first game (for example, the high navigation shown in FIG. 90 (A)). It is a game table characterized in that it is configured to be able to display the number display of the number of game media acquired in the state "500 sheets exceeded").

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. Further, in both the first game and the second game, the first counter (counter relating to the advantageous state) and the third counter (total number of game media acquired by the player) are updated, so that the first counter is updated. It is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as a first count value), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is described. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2). ), And the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIGS. 84 (C), (D)) relating to the first advantageous gaming state. The second counter shown in the above, the effect state counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is referred to. ) Is updatable, and even if a game that has not won the push order combination is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is updatable. A first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The game) is configured to be playable, and the second number is different from the first number. Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. Display including (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display and the first display. A specific display different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and the above-mentioned or The value is a value related to the second count value, and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the above-mentioned value is described. The count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the second display is displayable in the first advantageous gaming state. If the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. The game table is characterized in that, in the second game, the second display is not displayed and the third display can be displayed.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

It should be noted that a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays suggests the set value. (Hereinafter referred to as “third display”; for example, the setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 87 (A)), and when the first game is performed in the advantageous state. , The third display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed. It is configured so that a certain effect can be executed over a plurality of games, and the certain effect is a first scene (for example, a scene of "enemy attack") and a second scene. When the production is composed of a plurality of scenes including (for example, a scene of "ally attack"), and the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed. Is configured so that the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. If so, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game, and if the execution of the first game is started next, the execution of the first game is started. It may be configured so that the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, a right stop button, and a normal state (for example, a low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a high navigation state) and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. The game console is provided so that the operation information of the operation means can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display is used. The operation navigation that was used, the operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation for the push order combination, and is a first counter (for example, the operation navigation regarding the advantageous state). , The first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter), and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, “No. 1” It is configured to be updatable (referred to as one count value), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is , Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2). The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and the second counter (for example, FIGS. 84 (C), (D)) relating to the first advantageous gaming state is displayed. The second counter (the second counter shown, the effect state counter) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as “second count value”) is provided every time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. Is updatable, and even if a game that has not won the push order combination is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is updatable. , The first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet game). ) Is feasible, and the second number is different from the first number. Therefore, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. Display including (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value and is the first. When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous gaming state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the second game is started. If so, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as a "third display"; for example, a display of the start of a judge effect), which is the first advantage. When the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the gaming state, the third display can be displayed in the first game, and the second display in the certain state. It is a game table characterized in that when the execution of the game is started, the third display is not displayed in the second game.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

It should be noted that a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays suggests the set value. (Hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 87 (A)), when the first game is performed in the advantageous state. , The third display may be displayed, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed. It is configured to be able to give a certain profit when a certain profit giving condition (for example, a condition for starting a high navigation state) is satisfied, and the first one in the advantageous state. The execution of the game may be configured so that the certain profit-giving condition can be satisfied, and the execution of the second game in the advantageous state may be configured so that the certain profit-giving condition is not satisfied.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as "first count value"), and is advantageous when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied. It is configured to transition from the state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). It is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games after shifting to is reached the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states. The advantageous gaming state of one of the advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed. A second counter relating to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), an effect state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time, and the push order is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. Even when a game is played, the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) in which the second count value is updatable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number. And a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game). The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display and the second display. A specific display different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and the above-mentioned or The value is a value related to the second count value, and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the above-mentioned value is described. The count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the second display is displayable in the first advantageous gaming state. If the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. In the second game, the second display is not displayed and the third display can be displayed, based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. , A third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player is provided, and the count value of the third counter (hereinafter, "third count value") is provided every time one game is played in the advantageous state. For example, the difference number counter) is updatable, and the second end condition is satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). It is a possible condition, and regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the third count value is updated based on the result of the game. It is a game table characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing.

When the first game is executed after the second game is executed in the first advantageous game state, both the second game and the first game are executed in the first game. Based on the game result, the display regarding the number of acquired game media acquired in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media in the high navigation state "GET 1326 sheets") can be displayed. , A certain effect can be executed over a plurality of games, and the certain effect is a first scene (for example, a scene of "enemy attack") and a second scene (for example, a "friend"). It is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including the "attack" scene), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the first game is performed. When the execution of the effect of the second scene is started in one game and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. If the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game and then the execution of the first game is started, the execution of the second scene in the first game is started. It may be configured so that the execution of the effect can be started.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as "first count value"), and is advantageous when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied. It is configured to transition from the state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). It is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games after shifting to is reached the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states. The advantageous gaming state of one of the advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed. A second counter relating to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), an effect state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time, and the push order is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. Even when a game is played, the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) in which the second count value is updatable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number. And a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game). The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value and is the first. When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the second game is started. If so, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. A third counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state is provided, and one game is provided in the advantageous state. The count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as "third count value"; for example, the difference number counter) can be updated every time the operation is performed, and the second end condition is the first. It is a condition that can be satisfied when the count value of the third reaches the second specific value (for example, 1840), and either the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state. Even in this case, the third count value can be updated based on the result of the game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the start display of a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as the start display). , "Third display"; for example, a display of the start of the judge effect), and when the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous game state, the first. The third display is displayable in the game, and when the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the third display is displayed in the second game. It is a game table characterized by being configured so as not to be played.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

When the first game is executed after the second game is executed in the first advantageous game state, both the second game and the first game are executed in the first game. Based on the game result, the display regarding the number of acquired game media acquired in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the number display of the acquired game media in the high navigation state "GET 1326 sheets") can be displayed. , The execution of the first game in the advantageous state is configured so that a certain profit can be given when a certain profit giving condition (for example, a condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing) is satisfied. Then, the certain profit-giving condition may be configured to be feasible, and the certain profit-giving condition may not be satisfied in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as a first count value), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is described. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2). ), And the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIGS. 84 (C), (D)) relating to the first advantageous gaming state. The second counter shown in the above, the effect state counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is referred to. ) Is updatable, and even if a game that has not won the push order combination is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is updatable. A first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The game) is configured to be playable, and the second number is different from the first number. Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. Display including (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display and the first display. A specific display different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and the above-mentioned or The value is a value related to the second count value, and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the above-mentioned value is described. The count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the second display is displayable in the first advantageous gaming state. If the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. In the second game, the third display can be displayed without displaying the second display, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the start of a certain effect. It is a display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display"; for example, a display of the start of a judge effect), and when the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the first game is started. In the first game, the fourth display is configured to be displayable, and when the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the fourth display in the second game. It is a game table characterized in that the display is not displayed.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

It should be noted that it is configured so that a certain effect can be executed over a plurality of games, and the certain effect is a first scene (for example, a scene of "enemy attack") and a second scene (for example, "". It is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes including the "ally attack" scene), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the said In the first game, the execution of the effect of the second scene is configured to be startable, and when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. If the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game and then the execution of the first game is started, the second scene is started in the first game. It is configured so that the execution of the effect of can be started, and when a certain profit giving condition (for example, a condition for starting the high navigation state) is satisfied, a certain profit can be given. The execution of the first game in the advantageous state is configured so that the certain profit-giving condition can be satisfied, and the execution of the second game in the advantageous state does not satisfy the certain profit-giving condition. It may be configured.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as a first count value), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is described. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2). ), And the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIGS. 84 (C), (D)) relating to the first advantageous gaming state. The second counter shown in the above, the effect state counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is referred to. ) Is updatable, and even if a game that has not won the push order combination is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is updatable. A first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The game) is configured to be playable, and the second number is different from the first number. Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. Display including (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value and is the first. When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous gaming state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the second game is started. If so, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is provided with a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays suggests the set value. A certain display (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 85 (A)), and the first game is performed in the advantageous state. Is configured so that the third display may be displayed, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the third display may be displayed. It is a game table characterized by being configured not to be.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as a first count value), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is described. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2). ), And the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIGS. 84 (C), (D)) relating to the first advantageous gaming state. The second counter shown in the above, the effect state counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is referred to. ) Is updatable, and even if a game that has not won the push order combination is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is updatable. A first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The game) is configured to be playable, and the second number is different from the first number. Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. Display including (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value and is the first. When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous gaming state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the second game is started. If so, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. When the first game is executed after the execution of the second game in the first advantageous gaming state, the second game and the first game are performed in the first game. Based on both game results, it is possible to display a display regarding the number of acquired game media acquired in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state "GET 1326"). It is a game table characterized by the fact that it is.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, since the number of game media acquired in the advantageous state is displayed based on the game results of both the second game and the first game, the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing correctly in the first game are displayed. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as a first count value), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is described. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2). ), And the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIGS. 84 (C), (D)) relating to the first advantageous gaming state. The second counter shown in the above, the effect state counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is referred to. ) Is updatable, and even if a game that has not won the push order combination is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is updatable. A first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The game) is configured to be playable, and the second number is different from the first number. Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. Display including (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value and is the first. When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous gaming state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the second game is started. If so, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is configured so that a certain effect can be executed over a plurality of games, and the certain effect is a first scene (for example, a scene of "enemy attack") and a second scene (for example, a scene of "enemy attack"). , The production is composed of a plurality of scenes including the "ally attack" scene), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed. , The execution of the effect of the second scene is started in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. In that case, if the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is started. It is a game table characterized by being configured so that the execution of the production of the scene of the above can be started.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as a first count value), and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is described. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2). ), And the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter (for example, FIGS. 84 (C), (D)) relating to the first advantageous gaming state. The second counter shown in the above, the effect state counter) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is referred to. ) Is updatable, and even if a game that has not won the push order combination is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is updatable. A first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The game) is configured to be feasible, and the second number is different from the first number. Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing a certain value. Display including (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value and is the first. When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous game state, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated. The second display is displayable in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the execution of the second game is started. If so, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is configured so that a certain profit can be given when a certain profit giving condition (for example, a condition for starting a high navigation state) is satisfied, and the first game in the advantageous state is configured. The execution is configured so that the certain profit-giving condition can be satisfied, and the execution of the second game in the advantageous state is configured so that the certain profit-giving condition is not satisfied. It is a game table.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as "first count value"), and is advantageous when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied. It is configured to transition from the state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). It is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games after shifting to is reached the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states. The advantageous gaming state of one of the advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed. A second counter relating to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), an effect state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time, and the push order is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. Even when a game is played, the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) in which the second count value is updatable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number. And a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game). The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display and the first display. A specific display different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and the above-mentioned or The value is a value related to the second count value, and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the above-mentioned value is described. The count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the second display is displayable in the first advantageous gaming state. If the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. In the second game, the second display is not displayed and the third display can be displayed, based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. , A third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player is provided, and the count value of the third counter (hereinafter, "third count value") is provided every time one game is played in the advantageous state. For example, the difference number counter) is updatable, and the second end condition is satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). It is a possible condition, and regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the third count value is updated based on the result of the game. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth display"; for example, a display of the start of a judge effect), which is configured to be possible. When the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in one advantageous gaming state, the fourth display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and in the certain state. When the execution of the second game is started, the fourth display is not displayed in the second game. It is a game table characterized by.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

Further, the game console (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has an operating means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button), a normal state (for example, a low navigation state), and an advantageous state (for example). A control means (for example, a main control unit) for shifting to one of a plurality of states including (high navigation state), a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and the like. The game console is configured to be capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation". For example, a payout number display device is used. The operation navigation used (operation navigation using the liquid crystal display device) is in a more advantageous state than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation regarding the push order combination, and the first counter (the first counter regarding the advantageous state). For example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the high navigation state counter) is provided, and every time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "" It is configured to be updatable (referred to as "first count value"), and is advantageous when one of a plurality of termination conditions including the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied. It is configured to transition from the state to the normal state, and the first termination condition is when the first count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, an advantageous state). It is a condition that can be satisfied when the number of games after shifting to is reached the upper limit number of times), and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states. The advantageous gaming state of one of the advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed. A second counter relating to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a second counter shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), an effect state counter) is provided, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time, and the push order is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. Even when a game is played, the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) in which the second count value is updatable and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number. And a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game). The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"). For example, in the first display d1) shown in FIGS. 84 (C) and 84 (D), the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 84 (C)), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display and the first display. A specific display different from any of the two displays (hereinafter referred to as "third display"; for example, a display that makes the entire screen black, a special effect display, a display of a certain character image), and the above-mentioned or The value is a value related to the second count value, and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the above-mentioned value is described. The count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the second display is displayable in the first advantageous gaming state. If the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. In the second game, the second display is not displayed and the third display can be displayed, based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. , A third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player is provided, and the count value of the third counter (hereinafter, "third count value") is provided every time one game is played in the advantageous state. For example, the difference number counter) is updatable, and the second end condition is satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value (for example, 1840). It is a possible condition, and regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the third count value is updated based on the result of the game. It is configured to be possible, and a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the setting said to be set. A certain display suggesting a value (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”; for example, setting suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 87 (A)), and the first game is performed in the advantageous state. In that case, the fourth display may be displayed, and if the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the second game may be displayed. It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so that the fourth display may not be displayed.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify the player of what he / she was doing in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

Further, the game counter (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays and an operation means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right). A stop button), a control means (for example, a main control unit) that shifts to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, a low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state). Information capable of identifying the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using a payout number display, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, etc.) ) Can be notified, and the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and is based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. A first counter (for example, a difference number counter) for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player is provided, and the first count of the first counter is provided every time one game is played in the advantageous state. The value (for example, the count value of the difference number counter) is configured to be updatable, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when the advantageous state end condition is satisfied. The end condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the first count value reaches the first value (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). A second counter (for example, AT2) for managing a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2) among the plurality of advantageous gaming states, which is configured to be able to shift to one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state (for example). For example, an AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is provided, and a second count value of the second counter (for example, a count value of the AT2 remaining acquisition number display counter) is provided every time one game is played in the certain advantageous gaming state. Is configured to be updatable, and the certain advantageous gaming state end condition is configured to end when a certain advantageous gaming state end condition is satisfied, and the certain advantageous gaming state end condition is at least the above. It is a condition that can be satisfied when the second count value reaches the second value (for example, when the number of payouts of the game medium after the transition to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 planned acquisition number). The display of one of the types is the first display showing the value related to the second count value (for example, the remaining number display shown in FIG. 90 (A) (remaining 280). The first game (for example, a three-card game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3), and the second number (for example, the number of bets on the game medium). The second game (for example, a two-card game) which is 2) is configured to be feasible, and the second number is different from the first number, and the certain advantageous game. In the state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game (for example, the number of game media paid out per hour is large, the amount of profit per hour is large, and the game is per game. The net increase is large, it is easy to shift from the normal state to the advantageous state, it is difficult to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, etc.), and the execution result of the first game is that the number of payouts of the game medium is the first number. The result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") is different from the number (for example, 11). ), And the execution result of the second game is a number (for example, 11) in which the number of payouts of the game medium is different from the second number (hereinafter, "" The first game is executed in a state where the first display is displayed in the certain advantageous game state. In the case of the first result, the number of uses (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the first game are the count values of both the first count value and the second count value. The number of uses (or bets) and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display, and in the above-mentioned advantageous game state. When the second game is executed and the second result is obtained while the first display is displayed, the number of uses (or bets) of the game medium related to the execution of the second game. ) And the number of payouts can be reflected only in the first count value of the first count value and the second count value, and the number of game media used (or) related to the execution of the second game. The number of bets) and the number of payouts are configured so as not to be reflected in the first display, and the number of games used and the number of game media used in a certain game period (hereinafter referred to as “predetermined game period”) in the advantageous state. The total number of game media acquired by the player derived based on the number of payouts (hereinafter referred to as "total number of acquisitions"; for example, the number (506) indicated by the total number of acquisitions display counter shown in FIG. 90A). Is configured to be able to display a predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 90 (A)) when the predetermined number of sheets is reached, and the first game during the predetermined game period. When the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number by execution, the predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed based on the execution of the first game, and the second game can be displayed during the predetermined game period. Even when the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined number by execution, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game, and among the plurality of types of displays. One display is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as "second display"; for example, a display of the start of a judge effect), and the first game in a certain state in the advantageous game state. When the execution of the above is started, the second display is configured to be displayable in the first game, and the state is in a certain state. It is a game table characterized in that when the execution of the second game is started, the second display is not displayed in the second game.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even when the total number of game media acquired by the player reaches a predetermined number by executing the second game in a certain game period, the second game is performed. Since the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the game, it is possible to reduce the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like. .. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

Further, the game counter (for example, a slot machine) according to the present embodiment has a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays and an operation means (for example, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right). A stop button), a control means (for example, a main control unit) that shifts to one of a plurality of states including a normal state (for example, a low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state). Information capable of identifying the stop position, stop order, stop timing, etc. of each reel of the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using a payout number display, operation navigation using a liquid crystal display device, etc.) ) Can be notified, and the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and is based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. A second counter (for example, a difference number counter) for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player is provided, and a second count of the second counter is provided for each game played in the advantageous state. The value (for example, the count value of the difference number counter) is configured to be updatable, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when the advantageous state end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state end. The condition is satisfied at least when the second count value reaches the first value (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number (or a certain number of games)). It is a possible condition, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state. It is a gaming state, and includes a third counter related to the management of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, an AT2 remaining acquired number display counter indicating the number of game media that can be acquired in AT2), and the first advantageous gaming state. The third count value of the third counter (for example, the count value of the AT2 remaining acquired number display counter) can be updated every time one game is played, and the first advantageous game state end condition is set. When the condition is satisfied, the first advantageous gaming state is configured to end, and the first advantageous gaming state end condition is when the third count value reaches the second value (for example,). , When the number of game media paid out after shifting to the AT2 state reaches the AT2 planned acquisition number), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is It is the first display (for example, the remaining number display (remaining 280 pieces) shown in FIG. 90 (A)) showing the value related to the third count value, and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, 3). ) The first game (for example, a three-card game) and the second game (for example, a two-card game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, 2) can be executed. The second number is configured, and the second number is different from the first number, and in the first advantageous gaming state, the player is more likely to play the first game than the second game. Advantageous games (for example, a large number of game media paid out per hour, a large amount of profit per hour, a large net increase per game, easy transition from a normal state to an advantageous state, an advantageous state to a normal state (For example, it is difficult to shift to), and the execution result of the first game is a number (for example, 11) in which the number of payouts of the game medium is different from the first number (hereinafter, “first result”). ". ), And the execution result of the second game is a number (for example, 11) in which the number of payouts of the game medium is different from the second number (hereinafter, "" The first game is executed in the state where the first advantageous game state is displayed and the first display is displayed. In the case of the first result, the number of uses (or the number of bets) and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the first game are the counts of both the second count value and the third count value. The value can be reflected, and the number of uses (or bets) and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the first game can be reflected in the first display, and the first advantageous game. When the second game is executed and the second result is obtained in the state where the first display is displayed, the number of games used (or the number of game media related to the execution of the second game) is used. The number of bets) and the number of payouts can be reflected only in the second count value of the second count value and the third count value, and the number of game media used for executing the second game. (Or the number of bets) and the number of payouts are configured not to be reflected in the first display, and the game medium is used in the advantageous state and in a certain game period (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game period"). A first counter (for example, a total number of acquisitions display counter) that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player during the predetermined gaming period (hereinafter referred to as "total acquisitions") based on the number and the number of payouts. The display means is a means capable of displaying a predetermined number acquisition display (for example, a predetermined number acquisition display TG shown in FIG. 90A) when the total number of acquisitions reaches a predetermined value. When the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined value by executing the first game during the game period, the predetermined number acquisition display can be displayed based on the execution of the first game, and the predetermined number is displayed. Even if the total number of acquisitions reaches the predetermined value by executing the second game during the game period, the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed based on the execution of the second game. You may.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the number of games used and the number of payouts related to the execution of the second game are not reflected in the first display, which is more disadvantageous than the first game. It is possible to notify the player that the second game has been executed in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, even when the second game is executed, the total number of acquisitions reflects the number of games used and the number of payouts, so the player who is executing the first game and the second game are executed. It may be possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing. Further, even if the game medium is increased in the second game, the number of used game media and the number of payouts are not reflected in the third count value, and the first advantageous game state end condition is not affected. Therefore (because the advantageous state of the first advantageous game does not progress), the disappointment (feeling of loss) of the player who has executed the second game due to an operation error or the like can be reduced.

Further, the third counter counts the total number of gaming media acquired by the player in the first advantageous gaming state based on the number of used and paid out gaming media in the first advantageous gaming state. It may be a counter that does.

Further, it is configured so that a certain winning combination can be won by executing the first game, and the number of payouts of the game medium based on the winning of the certain winning combination is a certain number (for example, 11) of 1 or more. In the case where the winning combination is not won by the execution of the first game in a certain state in which the total number of acquisitions has reached the predetermined value by the execution of the second game during the predetermined game period. The first is configured so that the predetermined number acquisition display is not displayed, and in a certain state in which the total number of acquisitions has reached the predetermined value by executing the second game during the predetermined game period. When the certain winning combination is won by the execution of the game, the predetermined number acquisition display may be configured to be displayable.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display indicating a value related to the total number of acquisitions, and is the first advantageous gaming state, the first display and the second display. When the first game is executed and the first result is obtained while both of the indications are displayed, the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the first game are the first. Can be reflected in all the count values of the first count value, the second count value, and the third count value of the counter, and the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the first game. Is configured to be reflected in both the first display and the second display, and is the first advantageous gaming state and both the first display and the second display are displayed. When the second game is executed and the second result is obtained in the state where is displayed, the number of uses and the number of payouts of the game medium related to the execution of the second game are the first count values. The number of game media used that can be reflected in the first count value and the second count value of the second count value and the third count value and that are related to the execution of the second game. Although the number of payouts is not reflected in the first display, it may be configured so that it can be reflected in the second display.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Further, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the above-described embodiment.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 101 Main body 102 Front door 110 Left reel 111 Middle reel 112 Right reel 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 144L Left side lamp 144R Right side lamp 157 Directional image display device 165 1st chance button 166th 2 Chance button 167 Left button 168 Right button 190 1st selection switch 194 2nd selection switch 272 Upper speaker 277 Bass speaker 740 Backlight module

Claims (1)

Light emitting means and
Display means and
A selection operation means that allows you to select the power saving mode setting according to the operation,
It is a game table equipped with
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means.
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the first light emitting means may shift to the first state corresponding to the power saving mode setting. ,
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected, the display means may shift to a second state corresponding to the power saving mode setting.
When the selection operation means is operated, the power saving mode setting is selected, and the display means shifts to the second state, the first light emitting means shifts to the first state and then shifts. death,
The first light emitting means does not shift to the first state even if the selection operation means is operated while the non-demo animation is displayed and the power saving mode setting is selected, but the demo animation does. all SANYO migrating the setting of the selection operation means is operated該省power mode is selected in the state being displayed on the state of the first,
When the selection operation means is operated and the power saving mode setting is selected while the display means is displaying the demo animation, the display means does not display the display of the demo animation to the end and the demo animation is displayed. you start a new from the beginning the display of,
A game table featuring that.

Images